《相应部》中显示巴利原文
Saṃyuttanikāye
《六处品》注释显示巴利原文
Saḷāyatanavaggaṭīkā
1. 《六处相应》显示巴利原文
1. Saḷāyatanasaṃyuttaṃ
1. 《无常品》显示巴利原文
1. Aniccavaggo
1. 《内无常经》注释显示巴利原文
1. Ajjhattāniccasuttavaṇṇanā
1 “照见故为眼”(Cakkhatīti cakkhu),智(ñāṇa)也是如此,因为它依事物的真实面貌了知所缘,就像在揭示平坦与不平坦那样运转,这就是它的意义。同样,肉眼(maṃsacakkhu)也是如此,因为它在看见色的时候,能照见对象,所以叫做“眼”。只有佛陀才具备的眼,称为“佛眼”(buddhacakkhu)。因为佛眼能如实明了有情相续中的常断见(sassatucchedadiṭṭhi)、随顺智(anulomikañāṇa)与如实智(yathābhūtañāṇa),以及欲贪随眠(kāmarāgānusaya)等,所以它是意乐随眠智(āsayānusayañāṇa)和根上下智(indriyaparopariyattañāṇa),这是不共通于其他圣者的。低下的三个道,依前面所说的方式在四圣谛法中运转而作用于法,因此称为“法眼”(dhammacakkhu);同样,这些道的果,则是在各自对立的烦恼上,以止息和断除的方式而运转。因为在一切法中,它能周遍地达成眼的作用,所以叫做“一切眼”(samantacakkhu),也就是一切知智(sabbaññutaññāṇa)。由于以天住(dibbavihāra)为依止而可以获得,就像天人们的天眼那样,所以称它为“天眼”(dibbacakkhu),它属于一种神通差别(abhiññāvisesa)。由于它是增长光明而看见色的,因此说‘以光明遍满’(ālokapharaṇena)。又因为经中说‘诸比丘!我于前所未闻之法中,生起了眼:“这是苦圣谛”’等(《相应部》5.1081;《大品》15),所以把能决断四圣谛的智称为“慧眼”(paññācakkhu)。对于这个慧眼,有些人说它就是“观智”(vipassanāñāṇa),而另一些人则说它包括“观、道、果、省察智”(vipassanāmaggaphalapaccavekkhaṇañāṇāni)。显示巴利原文
1. Cakkhatīti cakkhu, ñāṇaṃ, yathāsabhāvato ārammaṇassa jānanena samavisamaṃ ācikkhantaṃ viya pavattatīti attho. Tathā maṃsacakkhu. Tampi hi rūpadassane cakkhatīti cakkhu. Buddhānaṃyeva cakkhūti buddhacakkhu, asādhāraṇato hi sattasantānesu sassatucchedadiṭṭhi anulomikañāṇayathābhūtañāṇānañceva kāmarāgānusayādīnañca yāthāvato vibhāvitañāṇaṃ āsayānusayañāṇaṃ indriyaparopariyattañāṇañca. Heṭṭhimā tayo maggā catusaccadhammesu vuttākārena pavattiyā dhamme cakkhūti dhammacakkhu, tathā tesaṃ phalāni taṃtaṃpaṭipakkhesu paṭippassaddhipahānavasena pavattanato. Samantato sabbadhammesu cakkhukiccasādhanato samantacakkhu, sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ. Dibbavihārasannissayena laddhabbato devānaṃ dibbacakkhu viyāti taṃ dibbacakkhu, abhiññāviseso. Ālokaṃ vaḍḍhetvā rūpadassanato ‘‘ālokapharaṇenā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Idaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccanti me, bhikkhave, pubbe ananussutesu dhammesu cakkhuṃ udapādī’’tiādinā (saṃ. ni. 5.1081; mahāva. 15) nayena āgatattā catusaccaparicchedakañāṇaṃ ‘‘paññācakkhū’’ti vuttaṃ. Tadidaṃ ‘‘vipassanāñāṇa’’nti vadanti, ‘‘vipassanāmaggaphalapaccavekkhaṇañāṇānī’’ti apare.
因为这些色是由作为缘的其他色所集聚起来的,所以称为“资具”(sambhārā),也就是作为支持物的四种依生色(catusamuṭṭhānikarūpā)。‘与资具一起’(saha sambhārehi)就是“有资具的”(sasambhāraṃ)。依托大种而变得清净,所以叫做“净色”(pasādo)。‘在眼窝、眼膜上’(akkhikūpake akkhipaṭalehi)是指在两块眼膜上。‘生起源’(sambhavo)指的是水界(āpodhātu),也就是作为生起基础的那个部分。这里说的是“十三资具”(terasa sambhārā)。不过,在《殊胜义注》(《法集论注》596)里,连同形状一起,说成“十四资具”(cuddasa sambhārā)。在那里,“形状”(saṇṭhāna)就是指色处(vaṇṇāyatana)本身,也就是成为圆形等形状的那个。之所以要单独把它列出来,是因为在之前所说的那个肉团(maṃsapiṇḍa)中,确实存在着如实或不如实的水界和色处。所说的‘生起源’是与依止于四界的那些要素相关联的,而当它与依止于其他三界的要素一同表述时,应当理解为它与三界有依止关系。‘在视野’(diṭṭhimaṇḍale)是指当人面对面站着时,影像会显现出来的地方,也就是被称为“眼”的视觉作用所生起的那个圆形领域。‘已安置’(sanniviṭṭhaṃ)——用这个词是为了显示眼净色(cakkhupasāda)具有众多聚的状态。确实,眼净色遍满了七层眼膜之后而存在。由于它在遍满七层眼膜之后而安住,并对自己所依止的那些住立着的净色提供帮助,同时又被同样依止于这些净色的寿(āyu)、颜色(vaṇṇa)等所守护和围绕,并且得到三续色(tisantatirūpa)的资具——时节(utu)、心(citta)、食(āhāra)——的支持,它就这样安住着。‘能见色’(rūpadassanasamatthaṃ)是指依止于自己而生起的识,有能力看见色处。‘广说’(vitthārakathā)就是指对这个眼以及耳等,通过因、缘等方式,以及通过相状等方式所作的详细解说。显示巴利原文
Paccayabhūtehi etehi abhisambharīyantīti sambhārā, upatthambhabhūtā catusamuṭṭhānikarūpā. Saha sambhārehīti sasambhāraṃ. Mahābhūtānaṃ upādāya pasīdatīti pasādo. Akkhikūpake akkhipaṭalehīti ubhohi akkhidalehi. Sambhavoti āpodhātumeva sambhavabhūtamāha. Idha ‘‘terasa sambhārā’’ti vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhasāliniyaṃ (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 596) pana saṇṭhānena saddhiṃ ‘‘cuddasa sambhārā’’ti āgataṃ. Tattha saṇṭhānanti vaṇṇāyatanameva parimaṇḍalādisaṇṭhānabhūtaṃ. Visuṃ vacanaṃ pana nesaṃ tathābhūtānaṃ atathābhūtānañca āpodhātuvaṇṇāyatanānaṃ yathāvutte maṃsapiṇḍe vijjamānattā. Sambhavassa catudhātunissitehi saha vuttassa dhātuttayanissitatā yojetabbā. Diṭṭhimaṇḍaleti abhimukhaṃ ṭhitānaṃ paṭibimbapaññāyanaṭṭhānabhūte cakkhusaññitāya diṭṭhiyā pavattiṭṭhānabhūte maṇḍale. Sanniviṭṭhanti etena cakkhupasādassa anekakalāpagatabhāvo dassito. Tathā hi so satta akkhipaṭalāni abhibyāpetvā vattati. Yasmā so satta akkhipaṭalāni byāpetvā ṭhitehi attano nissayabhūtehi katūpakāraṃ taṃnissiteheva āyuvaṇṇādīhi anupālitaparivāritaṃ tisantatirūpasamuṭṭhāpakehi utucittāhārehi upatthambhiyamānaṃ hutvā tiṭṭhati. Rūpadassanasamatthanti attānaṃ nissāya pavattaviññāṇassa vasena rūpāyatanadassanasamatthaṃ. Vitthārakathāti tassa cakkhuno sotādīnañca hetupaccayādivasena ceva lakkhaṇādivasena ca vitthārakathā.
“思惟行心”:指作为观之所依、应被观照的心。有人说它是“随观近行之唯作心”,那只是他们自己的见解。因为在此开示中,是通过显示三特相,激发观,为证得阿拉汉果而展开说法的。显示巴利原文
Sammasanacāracittanti vipassanāya pavattiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ vipassitabbaṃ cittaṃ. Keci ‘‘vipassanupagatakiriyamayacitta’’nti vadanti, taṃ tesaṃ matimattaṃ. Tīṇi lakkhaṇāni dassetvā vipassanaṃ ussukkāpetvā arahattassa pāpanavasena desanāya pavattattā.
2-3. 《内苦经》等注释显示巴利原文
2-3. Ajjhattadukkhasuttādivaṇṇanā
2-3 “二相”:指苦相与无我相这两种相。“一相”:指无我相。“其余”:指前面所说的其余诸相。“以此”:指凭借宣说第二、第三经的那些方式。“善区分”:指正确地确定。“以此量”:指以讲述两种相或唯一种相的方式。显示巴利原文
2-3.Dvelakkhaṇānīti dukkhānattalakkhaṇāni. Ekaṃ lakkhaṇanti anattalakkhaṇaṃ. Sesānīti vuttāvasesāni lakkhaṇāni. Tehīti yehi dutiyatatiyāni suttāni desitāni, tehi. Sallakkhitānīti sammadeva upadhāritāni. Ettakenāti dvinnaṃ ekasseva vā lakkhaṇassa kathanena.
4-6. 《外无常经》等注释显示巴利原文
4-6. Bāhirāniccasuttādivaṇṇanā
4-6 “所说的相似者”:指如同“二相”等所说的那样,是相似的。“理趣”:指类推之理。显示巴利原文
4-6.Vuttasadisovāti ‘‘dve lakkhaṇānī’’tiādinā vuttasadiso eva. Nayoti atidesanayo.
7-12. 《内无常过去未来经》等注释显示巴利原文
7-12. Ajjhattāniccātītānāgatasuttādivaṇṇanā
7-12 “善区分后”(sallakkhetvā)是就过去与未来而言:由于它们并非真实存在,对它们的执取却极为牢固,因此善加区分。至于现在,它虽存在,却为强烈的渴爱等执取所困。为引导那些在此中挣扎、致力于踏上观行道的有情,而宣说了此教导。显示巴利原文
7-12.Sallakkhetvāti atītānāgatānaṃ avijjamānattā gāhassa daḷhatāya sallakkhetvā. Paccuppannesu vijjamānattā balavatā taṇhādigāhena vipassanāvīthiṃ paṭipādetuṃ kilamantānaṃ vineyyānaṃ vasena.
2. 双品显示巴利原文
2. Yamakavaggo
1-4. 《第一正觉以前经》等的注释显示巴利原文
1-4. Paṭhamapubbesambodhasuttādivaṇṇanā
13-16 在这两部经中,依于“处”所开示的法味同一,故将第一与第二合举其名。“我慢安置于此”即是“我”,也就是“有身”。以“我”为所缘,称为“内”;凡属于此范畴、存在于该领域中的法,即名“内法”。所谓的“内”有四种:内内、自己内、行境内、对象内。其中,“内内”即那些在内而存在的内法,因此说“依内内之义,为他们内法”。像眼等这些,虽居内,其“内性”乃因有更强烈的所爱对象,故论中说“因欲贪极其有力”。今为显其相对面,并以举例方式说明其义,乃言“于人类中……”等,其义甚明。“外”即从内之外所存在的一切。显示巴利原文
13-16. Dvīsupi suttesu āyatanānaṃ vasena desanā ekarasāvāti ‘‘paṭhamadutiyesū’’ti ekajjhaṃ paduddhāro kato. Āhito ahaṃmāno etthāti attā, attabhāvo. Attānamadhi ajjhattaṃ, tappariyāpannattā tattha bhavāni ajjhattikāni, tesaṃ ajjhattikānaṃ. Ajjhattañca nāma ajjhattajjhattaṃ , niyakajjhattaṃ, gocarajjhattaṃ, visayajjhattanti catubbidhaṃ. Tattha ajjhattajjhattaṃ ajjhatte bhavanti ajjhattikanti āha ‘‘ajjhattajjhattavasena ajjhattikāna’’nti. Tesaṃ cakkhādīnaṃ ajjhattesupi ajjhattikabhāvo adhikasinehavatthutāyāti āha ‘‘chandarāgassa adhimattabalavatāyā’’ti. Idāni tattha tamatthaṃ paṭiyoginā saddhiṃ udāharaṇavasena dassento ‘‘manussānaṃ hī’’tiādimāha. Taṃ uttānameva. Bāhirānīti ajjhattikato bahi bhavāni.
5-6. 《第一如果没有乐味经》等的注释显示巴利原文
5-6. Paṭhamanoceassādasuttādivaṇṇanā
17-18 “已出离”指出离世间。“已离系”指由于断除了导致结缚的烦恼,故不再被系缚。“不倾向”指不发起勤励。“无边际……心”是指由于远离了烦恼轮回的边际,而成无有边际的心。因已宣说眼等诸根的乐味等,故实际上即是宣说四圣谛。显示巴利原文
17-18.Nikkhantāti lokato nikkhantā. Visaṃyuttā saṃyogahetūnaṃ kilesānaṃ pahīnattā no saṃyuttā. No adhimuttāti na ussukkajātā. Vimariyādī…pe… cetasāti vigatakilesavaṭṭamariyādatāya nimmariyādīkatena cittena. Catusaccameva kathitaṃ cakkhādīnaṃ assādādino kathitattā.
7-10. 《第一欢喜经》等注释显示巴利原文
7-10. Paṭhamābhinandasuttādivaṇṇanā
19-22 由于开示是依欢喜的生起与灭去而转起的,故唯是宣说轮回与还灭。“次第解说”指从起始逐句解释词义。“这些”是指那些经。显示巴利原文
19-22.Vaṭṭavivaṭṭameva kathitaṃ abhinandanānaṃ uppādanirodhānañca vasena desanāya pavattattā. Anupubbakathāti ādito paṭṭhāya padatthavaṇṇanā. Nesanti suttānaṃ.
第三 一切品显示巴利原文
3. Sabbavaggo
一、一切经注显示巴利原文
1. Sabbasuttavaṇṇanā
23 由于“一切”(sabba)一词在论典中,有时亦通用于有分限的范围,为遮除此义,便以表示“无余之境”的“一切”加以简别,故说“一切之一切”(sabbasabba),其义即是:本身即是全部,所以称为一切。成为处(āyatana)的一切,即名“处一切”;其余二种亦同此理。显示巴利原文
23. Sabba-saddo pakaraṇavasena katthaci sappadesepi pavattatīti tato nivattanatthaṃ anavasesavisayena sabba-saddena visesetvā vuttaṃ ‘‘sabbasabba’’nti, sabbameva hutvā sabbanti attho. Āyatanabhāvaṃ sabbaṃ āyatanasabbaṃ, sesadvayepi eseva nayo.
由于他的智慧没有任何非境界的东西,所以说「于此,无有任何未见者」。这里的「于此」(idha)只是一个语助词,也可以是“在此包含天神在内的世间”。意思是:以那作为见的智慧来观察,没有任何名叫未见的东西。如果这样,那么比量所行境(推论所知的范围)又是如何的呢?因此接着说「以及无有未识者」(atho aviññātaṃ)。对于其他人,即使并非现量,也会有未识的东西;但对佛陀来说,完全没有任何未识的东西,所以说未见、未识都没有。已经含摄了现在与过去所应知的,那么未来又是如何呢?因此说「无有应知者」(ajānitabbaṃ),把这句话引过来,它的意思是:对他而言,没有任何应知的东西。为了显示对他没有什么是无法知、无法了知的,于是说「他遍知了一切」(sabbaṃ abhiññāsī)等。显示巴利原文
Tassa avisayābhāvato na addiṭṭhamidhatthi kiñcīti. Idhāti nipātamattaṃ, idha vā sadevake loke, dassanabhūtena ñāṇena adiṭṭhaṃ nāma kiñci natthīti attho. Yadi evaṃ anumānavisayaṃ nu kho kathanti āha ‘‘atho aviññāta’’nti. Aññesaṃ apaccakkhampi aviññātaṃ tassa kiñci natthīti adiṭṭhaṃ aviññātaṃ natthi. Paccuppannaṃ atītameva ñeyyaṃ gahitaṃ, anāgataṃ nu kho kathanti āha – ‘‘ajānitabba’’nti, tassa kiñci natthīti ānetvā sambandho. Jānituṃ ñātuṃ asakkuṇeyyaṃ nāma tassa kiñci natthīti dassento āha ‘‘sabbaṃ abhiññāsī’’tiādi.
由于完整地把握了整个有身法(sakkāyadhamma),所以称为「有身一切」。在「一切法」中,是指成为五门所缘(ārammaṇa)的所有法。因为在摄取了六种所缘的情况下,就不再叫作「有处一切」了,所以说「仅是五所缘」。「有处一切」不能达到「有身一切」,因为它不包含三地法中的一部分。「有身一切」不能达到「处一切」,因为它不包含出世间法。「处一切」不能达到「一切之一切」。因为「处一切」只摄取了四地法,而不摄取相(特征)和施设;而显示「一切之一切」的时候,显示的是佛陀智慧的境界。所以这里在说“‘一切之一切’不能达到……”时,也是依知与所缘来进行问答的,就像问“为何?……因为没有……”那样。论师们说:“即使在‘处一切’当中,这里也只应取那些与观(vipassanā)相应的法,因为在‘应遍知’的解说法中,也仅意图指向思惟行的范围。”显示巴利原文
Sakalassa sakkāyadhammassa pariggahitattā sakkāyasabbaṃ. Sabbadhammesūti pañcannaṃ dvārānaṃ ārammaṇabhūtesu sabbesu dhammesu. Yasmā chasupi ārammaṇesu gahitesu padesasabbaṃ nāma na hoti, tasmā ‘‘pañcārammaṇamatta’’nti vuttaṃ. Padesasabbaṃ sakkāyasabbaṃ na pāpuṇāti tassa tebhūmakadhammesu ekadesassa asaṅgaṇhanato. Sakkāyasabbaṃ āyatanasabbaṃ na pāpuṇāti lokuttaradhammānaṃ asaṅgaṇhanato. Āyatanasabbaṃ sabbasabbaṃ na pāpuṇāti. Yasmā āyatanasabbena catubhūmakadhammāva pariggahitā, na lakkhaṇapaññattiyo, yasmā sabbasabbaṃ dassentena buddhañāṇavisayo dassito, tasmā ‘‘sabbasabbaṃ na pāpuṇātī’’ti etthāpi ‘‘kasmā…pe… natthitāyā’’ti sabbaṃ ñātārammaṇeneva pucchāvissajjanaṃ kataṃ. ‘‘Āyatanasabbepi idha vipassanupagadhammāva gahetabbā abhiññeyyaniddesavasenapi sammasanacārasseva icchitattā’’ti vadanti.
「遮止之后」(Paṭikkhipitvā)意为:像这样——“这不被称为一切”——予以遮止之后。对于那位说“我将施设另一个一切”的人,其言说「仅是言说对象的基础而已」,如同说“石女之子”“虚空之花”那样,这些言辞唯有一个可说的对象作为基础,并无真实的意义,也就是说只是空话。「超越之后」(Atikkamitvā)意为:不涉及、不执取之后。那么,「此是何因?」是问:造成困扰的原因是什么?「正如于非境中那样」(yathā taṃ avisayasmiṃ),意思是:如同任何其他人,在并非自己能力的范围内努力一样。在义注中,为了以譬喻显示经文“此是何因”所说的那个原因,才说了“正如”等语句。而原因的譬喻本身也就是原因,因此“‘正如’是表示原因的词”,应当这样理解。正因为如此,才说“就像这样,在此也是于非境中……”等。显示巴利原文
Paṭikkhipitvāti ‘‘idaṃ sabbaṃ nāma na hotī’’ti evaṃ paṭikkhipitvā. Tassāti ‘‘aññaṃ sabbaṃ paññāpessāmī’’ti vadantassa. Vācāya vattabbavatthumattakamevāti vañjhāputtagaganakusumādivācā viya etassa vācāya kevalaṃ vattabbavatthukameva bhaveyya, na attho, vacanamattakamevāti attho . Atikkamitvāti anāmasitvā aggahetvā. Taṃ kissa hetūti vighātāpajjanaṃ kena hetunā. Yathā taṃ avisayasminti yathā aññopi koci avisaye vāyamanto, evanti attho. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana yasmā pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘taṃ kissa hetū’’ti vuttakāraṇameva upanayanavasena dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā ta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Kāraṇopanayanañca kāraṇamevāti ‘‘yathāti kāraṇavacana’’nti vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘evaṃ imasmimpi avisaye’’tiādi.
二 断除经的注释显示巴利原文
2. Pahānasuttavaṇṇanā
24 「对一切」(sabbassāti):指与门和所缘一起,于门中生起的一切。「为了断除」(pahānāyāti):以断除对此的欲贪(chandarāga)而作断除。「眼触」(cakkhusamphassanti):指依于眼的触。「作为根本缘」(mūlapaccayanti):意为作为根本的缘;当眼触作为俱生受的缘时,此后便无需再作说明。「以此类推」(eseva nayoti):通过这样的方式,显示接下来应说“以耳触为根本缘”等。「意」(manoti):指有分心,因为此处所说的是意门。「所缘」(ārammaṇanti):指法所缘。「伴随转向的速行」(sahāvajjanakajavananti):指与意门转向一同生起的速行。因为在眼等一切门中所说的那些受,都以速行心为前行者,而成为意识触与受的根本缘;随顺此关系,故说为「与有分俱生的触」。与转向俱起的受及速行的受,即是所说的「感受」(vedayitanti)。至于取与有分相应的受,此处则没有需要说明的。不应离开有分,显示巴利原文
24.Sabbassāti dvārārammaṇehi saddhiṃ dvārappavattassa. Pahānāyāti tappaṭibaddhachandarāgapahānavasena pajahanāya. Cakkhusamphassanti cakkhusannissitaphassaṃ. Mūlapaccayanti mūlabhūtaṃ paccayaṃ katvā, sahajātavedanāya cakkhusamphassapaccayabhāve vattabbameva natthi. Eseva nayoti apadesena ‘‘sotasamphassaṃ mūlapaccayaṃ katvā’’tiādinā vattabbanti dasseti. Manoti bhavaṅgacittaṃ manodvārassa adhippetattā. Ārammaṇanti dhammārammaṇaṃ. Sahāvajjanakajavananti sahamanodvārāvajjanakaṃ javanaṃ. Taṃpubbakattā manoviññāṇaphassavedanānaṃ mūlapaccayabhūtā sabbesveva cakkhudvārādīsu vuttittā tadanurūpato ‘‘bhavaṅgasahajāto samphasso’’ti vuttaṃ. Sahāvajjanavedanāya javanavedanā ‘‘vedayita’’nti adhippetā, bhavaṅgasampayuttāya pana vedanāya gahaṇe vattabbameva natthi. Bhavaṅgato amocetvā bhavaṅgacittena saddhiṃyeva āvajjanaṃ gahetvā manodvārāvajjanaṃ bhavaṅgaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yā panettha desanāti yā ettha ‘‘pahānāyā’’tiādinā pavattadesanā satthu anasiṭṭhi āṇā. Ayaṃ paṇṇatti nāma tassa tassa atthassa pakārato ñāpanato. Ettha sabbaggahaṇena sabbe sabhāvadhammā gahitā, paññatti pana katamāti vicāraṇāya taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yā panetthā’’tiādi vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
3. 《自证、遍知、断除经》的注释显示巴利原文
3. Abhiññāpariññāpahānasuttavaṇṇanā
25 25.「自证」(abhiññāti):即通过自证。此处是省略了字母ya的表述,正如“亲自证知”(sayaṃ abhiññā)等(《长部》1.28, 405;《中部》1.154)中的用法一样;同样,「遍知」(pariññāti)一词也是如此。「一切」(sabbanti):指十二处的一切,因为这一切皆应被自证。“由自证而知”(abhijānitvāti):指通过自证而了知。“由遍知”(parijānitvāti):是以观察的遍知,从无常等角度普遍地了知。“为了断除”(pajahanatthāyāti):则是以断除的遍知,毫无剩余地予以断除。显示巴利原文
25.Abhiññāti abhiññāya. Ya-kāralopavasenāyaṃ niddeso ‘‘sayaṃ abhiññā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.28, 405; ma. ni. 1.154) viya, tathā ‘‘pariññā’’ti etthāpi. Sabbanti āyatanasabbaṃ. Tañhi abhiññeyyaṃ. Abhijānitvāti abhiññāya jānitvā. Parijānitvāti tīraṇapariññāya aniccādito parijānitvā. Pajahanatthāyāti pahānapariññāya anavasesato pajahanāya.
4. 《第一不遍知经》的注释显示巴利原文
4. Paṭhamaaparijānanasuttavaṇṇanā
26 经文从“自证”(abhijāna)等语开始之处,世尊为随顺所化众生之意乐,先显示黑分,后显示白分。因此,此处既宣说了流转,也宣说了还灭。显示巴利原文
26. ‘‘Abhijāna’’ntiādinā ettha bhagavā paṭhamaṃ kaṇhapakkhaṃ dassetvā sukkapakkhaṃ dasseti veneyyajjhāsayavasena. Tenettha vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ kathitaṃ.
5. 《第二不遍知经》的注释显示巴利原文
5. Dutiyaaparijānanasuttavaṇṇanā
27 所谓“眼识所识知的法”,即是色处本身,故注释说“即是下所取色”。此处因说到“眼识所识知的诸法”,而下文又毫无遗漏地说“凡彼色等”,因此无论现前或不现前,皆已全部取入。那些受、想、行蕴,是与眼识一起被识知的。实际上,眼识与他们同生、同一依处、同灭、并缘取同一所缘。在其余的句子中——即黑分的五处(如“以及耳和诸声等”)和白分的六处,道理也是如此。意思是:前文解释“下所取色”的理趣,在彼处亦是解释的理趣。显示巴利原文
27. Cakkhuviññāṇaviññātabbadhammo nāma rūpāyatanamevāti āha ‘‘heṭṭhā gahitarūpamevā’’ti. Idha anāpāthagataṃ ‘‘cakkhuviññāṇaviññātabbā dhammā’’ti vuttattā. Heṭṭhā āpāthagatampi anāpāthagatampi gahitameva ‘‘ye ca rūpā’’ti anavasesato vuttattā. Te hi vedanāsaññāsaṅkhārakkhandhā saha cakkhuviññāṇena viññātabbattā. Tathā hi cakkhuviññāṇaṃ tehi ekuppādaṃ ekavatthukaṃ ekanirodhaṃ ekārammaṇameva. Sesapadesūti sesesu ‘‘yañca sotaṃ ye ca saddā’’tiādinā āgatesu kaṇhapakkhe pañcasu, sukkapakkhe chasupi padesu. Eseva nayoti yvāyaṃ ‘‘heṭṭhā gahitarūpameva gaṇhitvā’’ti attho vutto. Eso eva tatthapi atthavaṇṇanānayo.
6.《燃烧经》的注释显示巴利原文
6. Ādittasuttavaṇṇanā
28 在迦耶河不远处,有一名为迦耶的村落。“住于迦耶”(tassaṃ gayāyaṃ viharatīti)一语,乃是表示邻近处的处格用法。实际上,世尊当时是住在迦耶村附近、名为“迦耶头”的石背上,因此经中说“世尊住于此处”。显示巴利原文
28. Gayānāmikāya nadiyā avidūre pavatto gāmo gayā nāma, tassaṃ gayāyaṃ viharatīti samīpatthe cetaṃ bhummavacanaṃ. Gayāgāmassa hi āsanne gayāsīsanāmake piṭṭhipāsāṇe bhagavā tadā vihāsi. Tenāha ‘‘bhagavā tattha viharatī’’ti.
「在那里」(tatrāti):即经文中的「对比丘们说」,既指被召唤的那些比丘,也说明这一开示如何成为适宜他们的教法。在这两种应加以阐明的事理中,这是一部从缘起开始、次第展开的渐次解说。「从此」(itoti) 意为从这个劫以来。「据说」(kirāti) 是表示传闻的小品词。藉由波罗蜜的修习而成熟圆满。「智」(ñāṇeti) 指觉悟之智。幼子即世尊的异母弟弟。外围以竹墙小屋环绕,内部则张设帷幕。显示巴利原文
Tatrāti ‘‘bhikkhū āmantesī’’ti ye bhikkhū āmantesi, yathā cāyaṃ desanā tesaṃ sappāyā jātā, tatra tasmiṃ atthadvaye vibhāvetabbe ayaṃ anupubbikathā samudāgamato paṭṭhāya anupaṭipāṭikathā. Itoti imasmā kappato. Kirāti anussavanatthe nipāto. Pāramitāparibhāvanāya paripākagate. Ñāṇeti bodhiñāṇe. Kaniṭṭhaputto vemātikabhātā bhagavato. Veḷubhittikuṭikāhi parikkhipitvā bahiddhā, anto pana paṭasāṇīhi.
「所有众生」(sabbesaṃ sattānaṃ)。将福德之思导入内心深处。世尊亦被视作他的儿子,故经文说「其他三个儿子」。「不消散」(avippakiritvāti) 指不因败亡而溃散,不逃跑。「隐藏了」(pidahīti) 即「我无法给予」,便那样做了。「以真实语而得偿所愿」(saccavāditāya gaṇhiṃsūti) 指因为王族的真实语,他们为自己求取了愿求。显示巴利原文
Sabbesaṃ sattānaṃ. Puññacetanaṃ anto abbhantare paveseti. Bhagavāpi tassa puttoti katvā ‘‘aññe tayo puttā’’ti vuttaṃ. Avippakiritvāti parājayena avippakiriya apalāyitvā. Pidahīti dātuṃ na sakkomīti tathā akāsi. Saccavāditāya gaṇhiṃsūti rājakulassa saccavāditāya attano varaṃ gaṇhiṃsu.
「退了回去」(vinivattitunti) 指从承诺中退转。「在中间」(antarāti) 指在你们所划定的期限尚未到来之前,便已中途死去。所谓「一牛吼地」(usabhaṃ nāma) 是指二十八肘长的处所。「在一牛吼地」(usabhe) 即在这二十八肘量的地方。「致力于布施之首」(dānagge byāvaṭoti) 即专心投入于布施的最上事。显示巴利原文
Vinivattitunti paṭiññāya nivattituṃ. Antarāti tumhehi paricchinnakālassa antarā eva matā. Aṭṭhavīsatihatthaṭṭhānaṃ usabhaṃ nāma. Usabhe aṭṭhavīsatihatthappamāṇe ṭhāne. Dānagge byāvaṭoti pasuto.
「他」指世尊。诸佛的教诫神变正是如此:由教说所把握的义理,如同亲证般清晰显现。因此他说:「我将对他们……开示。」「决断」意指:对于长久熏习燃烧之火的人们来说,唯有以燃烧为次第的教说才为适宜,他作出了这样的决断。「被点燃」是指被十一种火点燃,成为一片火网,故经文说「充分燃烧」。「苦相被开显」意即:依十一种火说明眼等处于燃烧状态,因其苦的本质而说为苦,由此开显了苦相。显示巴利原文
Soti bhagavā. Tathārūpañhi buddhānaṃ desanāpāṭihāriyaṃ, yathā desanāya gahito attho paccakkhato vibhūto hutvā upaṭṭhāti. Tenāha ‘‘imesaṃ…pe… desessāmī’’ti. Sanniṭṭhānanti cirakālaparicitādittaaggikānaṃ ādittapariyāyadesanāva sappāyāti nicchayamakāsi. Padittanti padīpitaṃ ekādasahi aggīhi ekajālībhūtaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘sampajjalita’’nti. Dukkhalakkhaṇaṃ kathitaṃ cakkhādīnaṃ ekādasahi aggīhi ādittabhāvena dukkhamatāya dukkhassa kathitattā.
7. 《被征服经》注释显示巴利原文
7. Addhabhūtasuttavaṇṇanā
29 「addha」一词与「adhi」同义,因此他说「addhabhūta即adhibhūta」等。其余依前述理路可知。显示巴利原文
29. Adhisaddena samānattho addhasaddoti āha ‘‘addhabhūtanti adhibhūta’’ntiādi. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
8. 《拔除适切经》注释显示巴利原文
8. Samugghātasāruppasuttavaṇṇanā
30 所谓「计度」,应理解为被渴爱、慢、见所执取的计度。「于一切计度」即对一切的计度,断除它即是断桥,能成就此断除的,便是「断除一切计度之适切」。然而在注释书中又开示了第二种理路:「所谓计度,唯于眼等处生起,不于他处。」「随顺」即适合、不相违。「于此」即唯在此教法中,因为其他处无此教法。为了显示先前所说的「渴爱、慢、见之计度」这三种计度,如何在自他相续中以对立的方式结合,故说「眼是我」等。其中,以「眼是我」显示了以内在为所缘的「见计度」,因为它指出了执取自我的我见。以「我的」则显示了「渴爱计度」或「慢计度」,因为由执取的方式,从「这更好」等也会生起慢。其余两类词亦应依此理路理解计度的分类。「我」即自我本身,而它依于眼,由于其言说依眼而说,故不计度「他」。「我的」则是一种系缚障碍,因为只有在眼存在时它才能被获得,眼不存在时则不计度,因为对这样计度的人而言,所依的缘已经坏灭。余下两组也应同样理解。显示巴利原文
30. Maññitaṃ nāma taṇhāmānadiṭṭhīhi gahetabbaṃ maññitaṃ. Sabbasmiṃ maññitanti sabbamaññitaṃ, tassa samugghāto setughāto, tadāvahaṃ sabbamaññitasamugghātasāruppaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘maññitaṃ nāma cakkhādīsu eva uppajjati, nāññasmi’’nti dutiyanayo vutto. Anucchavikanti anurūpaṃ avilomaṃ. Idhāti idheva sāsane aññattha tadabhāvato. ‘‘Taṇhā-mānadiṭṭhimaññitāna’’nti vuttaṃ maññitattayaṃ saparasantānesu paṭipakkhavasena yojetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘cakkhuṃ ahanti vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘cakkhuṃ aha’’nti iminā ajjhattavisayaṃ diṭṭhimaññitañca dasseti attābhinivesāhaṃkāradīpanato. ‘‘Mama’’nti iminā taṇhāmaññitaṃ mānamaññitampi vā, pariggahamukhenapi seyyādito mānuppajjanato. Sesapadadvayepi iminā nayena maññitavibhāgo veditabbo. Ahanti attāva, so ca cakkhusmiṃ tadadhīnavuttittā ‘‘paro’’ti na maññati. Mama kiñcanapalibodho cakkhusmiṃ sati labbhanato, asati na maññati tathāmaññitassa paccayaghātato. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo.
「我由眼而来」:当说为「我」的这个有情,由眼而来,因为在那里它以一种极微细的形态被感知到。「我的」——系缚障碍——由眼而来,因为唯有在眼存在时,它才被感知到。其余两组(耳、鼻等门)也依同一理趣。其中,「他」是指其他有情。他不会认为「这是我的眼」,因为对于拥有那只眼的人来说,根本没有一个可称为「我」者。「我所性之因」即是产生「我的」之因。余义易了。如是,于此经中,依眼、色、眼识、眼触,及乐、苦、不苦不乐受,在眼门有七轮;耳门等也是如此,故成六七四十二。又依有身而说「于一切不计度」等,故为四十三。再取三界之轮为「世间」,而说「于世间不执取任何物」,故为四十四。当知,在这所有四十四处中,正是为证阿罗汉果而开示了观。某些抄本写成‘超过四十四乃至百数’,那只是笔误。显示巴利原文
Ahaṃ cakkhuto niggatoti ‘‘aha’’nti vattabbo ayaṃ satto cakkhuto niggato tattha sukhumākārena upalabbhanato. Mama kiñcanapalibodho cakkhuto niggato tasmiṃ sati eva upalabbhanato . Sesadvayepi eseva nayo. Tattha paroti paro satto. Mama cakkhūti na maññati yassa taṃ cakkhu, tassa ‘‘aha’’nti vattabbasseva abhāvato. Mamattabhūtanti mama kāraṇaṃ. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Evametasmiṃ sutte cakkhurūpa-cakkhuviññāṇa-cakkhusamphassa-sukhadukkhādukkhamasukhavasena satta vārā cakkhudvāre, tathā sotadvārādīsūti cha sattakā dvecattālīsa. Puna sakkāyavasena ‘‘sabbaṃ na maññatī’’tiādinā vuttaṃ, tena tecattālīsa. Puna tebhūmakavaṭṭaṃ ‘‘loko’’ti gahetvā ‘‘na kiñci loke upādiyatī’’ti vuttaṃ, tena catucattālīsa honti. Evaṃ sabbathāpi catucattālīsāya ṭhānesu arahattaṃ pāpetvā vipassanā kathitāti veditabbā. ‘‘Catucattālīsādhikasatesū’’ti kesuci potthakesu likhanti, sā ca pamādalekhā.
9. 《第一拔除适切经》注释显示巴利原文
9. Paṭhamasamugghātasappāyasuttavaṇṇanā
31 「成为助伴」:因为能带来那个。「从彼」:即从计度的形态。「那」:指计度所依。「以不同行相」:即如同以无常等行相去计度时,它却以不同的无常等行相而生起。「变异、变坏」:由生灭而成的变异,以及由老死而成的两种变坏。趋入于它,就成为「变异者」;即使已经如此,但在具有衰坏、破裂性质的存在中,有情仍喜悦存在。将下面所取的收摄为一:即以「不计度眼」等,把下面所取的蕴、界、处,依于蕴等理路收摄为一,再次显示计度所依。最终连同「从彼而有彼」这一句,在一切轮中皆为八个一组,故说「于四十八处」。显示巴利原文
31.Upakārabhūtā tadāvahattā. Tatoti maññitākārato. Tanti maññanāvatthuṃ. Aññenākārenāti yathā maññati aniccādiākārato, aññena aniccādinā ākārena hoti. Aññathābhāvaṃ vipariṇāmanti uppādavayatāya aññathābhāvaṃ jarāya maraṇena ca dvedhā vipariṇāmetabbaṃ. Taṃ upagamanena aññathābhāvī, evaṃbhūto hutvāpi jīraṇabhijjanasabhāvesu. Bhavesu satto loko uparipi bhavaṃyeva abhinandati. Heṭṭhā gahitameva saṅkaḍḍhitvāti ‘‘cakkhuṃ na maññatī’’tiādinā heṭṭhā gahitameva khandhadhātuāyatanāti khandhādipariyāyena ekato gahetvā punapi maññanāvatthuṃ dasseti. Avasāne ‘‘tato taṃ hotī’’ti vuttapadena saddhiṃ sabbavāresu aṭṭha aṭṭha hontīti ‘‘aṭṭhacattālīsāya ṭhānesū’’ti vuttaṃ.
10. 《第二拔除适切经》注释显示巴利原文
10. Dutiyasamugghātasappāyasuttavaṇṇanā
32 「显示了之后」:此处,词缀 tvā 或表示相,或表示因。因为大师(佛陀)的特征正是无始以来有情相续中的三种执取相,而三转法轮的开示即以此为所缘,其转起的目的,唯是为了断除它。注释中说:‘为证得阿罗汉果而开示观。’——也就是说:‘观与四道一同被开示了。’显示巴利原文
32.Dassetvāti ettha lakkhaṇe ayaṃ tvā-saddo, hetumhi vā. Anādisattasantānagatagāhattayalakkhitā hi satthu, tiparivaṭṭadesanā taṃnimittaṃ yāvadeva tappahānāya pavattitabhāvato. Arahattaṃ pāpetvā vipassanā kathitāti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘saha vipassanāya cattāropi maggā kathitā’’ti.
4. 《有生之法品》注释显示巴利原文
4. Jātidhammavaggavaṇṇanā
33-42 “生起之本质”:即依于因缘而生起的本质。“生起后即衰老的本质”:由于生起后随即趋于成熟,故为衰老之本质。在眼等之处,以异分生起之相为疾病生起的缘,此即“病的本质”。“死的本质”:即坏灭的本质。“忧的本质”:是因亲属衰败等而被忧火所烧灼的痛苦本质。“杂染法的本质”:是由渴爱等而令心有杂染的本质。显示巴利原文
33-42.Nibbattanasabhāvanti hetupaccayehi uppajjanasabhāvaṃ. Uppādānantaraṃ buddhippattiyā jīraṇasabhāvaṃ. Yattha cakkhādayo, tattheva visabhāgasamuṭṭhānalakkhaṇena byādhino uppattipaccayabhāvena byādhisabhāvaṃ. Maraṇasabhāvanti vināsasabhāvaṃ. Sokasabhāvanti ñātibyasanādinā ḍayhamānadukkhasabhāvaṃ. Saṃkilesikasabhāvanti taṇhādivasena saṃkilissanasabhāvaṃ.
5. 《一切无常品》注释显示巴利原文
5. Sabbaaniccavaggavaṇṇanā
43-52 「知遍知」是从所缘的角度而说的,因为它阐明以该境为对象的法。应知其余两种遍知——「度遍知」与「断遍知」——亦已被提及,因为它们以所应证知的法为境,也因为从智中能生起度遍知与断遍知。在“应遍知”的文句中,仅提到了度遍知;在“应断除”的文句中,仅提到了断遍知——这便是此处文句的关联。实际上,其余两种遍知也已被默示地包含在内,因为若离开它们,义理便不能成就。“应当被现证”的意思,即通过从所缘上不迷乱地通达而现证。即使未被明确宣说,它们也已被默示地包含了,因为遍知的目的终究是为了断除。「种种义」:即“以同一本质而成为无有”。「被损害的义」:如同被重病所侵袭,内在的一切都被击破了。显示巴利原文
43-52.Ñātapariññā āgatā visayavasena tabbisayassa dhammassa jotitattā. Itarā dve tīraṇapahānapariññāpi āgatā evāti veditabbā, tāsaṃ abhiññeyyadhammavisayattā ñāṇassa ca tīraṇapahānapariññāsambhavato. Pariññeyyapade tīraṇapariññāva āgatā, pahātabbapade pahānapariññāva āgatāti yojanā. Itarāpi dve gahitāyeva tāhi vinā atthasiddhiyā abhāvato. Paccakkhaṃ kātabbaṃ ārammaṇato asammohato paṭivijjhanena. Avuttāpi gahitāyeva parijānanassa yāvadeva pahānatthattā. Ekasabhāvena vinābhāvo anekaggaṭṭho. Upasaṭṭharogena viya anto eva abhihatasabbatā upahataṭṭho.
《无明品》注释显示巴利原文
6. Avijjāvaggavaṇṇanā
53-62 「于四圣谛中无知」:指覆盖这四圣谛的迷乱。它能认知不应被认知者,而对应该被认知者却不能认知;正因如此,无明即是明的对立面。当明生起时,无明便被无余地断除;为显示此义,他说“明”就是指阿拉汉道的明。为了说明“道的出起”并非仅依于无常随观,也依于苦随观等其余随观,他宣说道:“依于苦随观……确实被断除”。所谓“在一切处”,是针对下文接下来的经文而说的。依此方式,按其意义与相状,在其余经文中也作了说明。那些经文也是依能如此通达者之意乐而宣说的。显示巴利原文
53-62.Catūsu saccesu aññāṇaṃ tappaṭicchādakasammoho. Avindiyaṃ vindati, vindiyaṃ na vindatīti katvā vijjāya paṭipakkhova avijjā. Vijjāya uppannāya anavasesato avijjā pahīyati, taṃ dassento ‘‘vijjāti arahattamaggavijjā’’ti āha. Na kevalaṃ aniccānupassanāvaseneva maggavuṭṭhānaṃ, atha kho itarānupassanāvasenapīti dassento ‘‘dukkhā…pe… pahīyatiyevā’’ti āha. Sabbatthāti uparisuttante sandhāyāha. Tato aparepi taṃatthalakkhaṇavasena kathitasuttantepi. Tānipi hi tathā bujjhanakapuggalānamajjhāsayena vuttānīti.
第七品 弥伽阇品显示巴利原文
7. Migajālavaggo
第一经 弥嘎加喇经注(一)显示巴利原文
1. Paṭhamamigajālasuttavaṇṇanā
63 所谓“眼识具有看的功用”,即以此眼识所应看者,故说“成为可意所缘”。“可欲”,即应为欲贪所追求者。增长心意,故为“悦意”,即解说为“令心意增长者”。具有令人喜爱的本质,则称“可爱色”。“与欲相应”,即与贪欲结合;而此处所谓相应,实即执取所缘之义,故说“取为所缘”等。称为渴爱之喜,并非如“喜行”等经中所说那种满足的喜悦。“村边”即村落附近。解说“近行处”后,再具体指出其处:“在那里……”等。显示巴利原文
63. Cakkhuviññāṇaṃ dassanakiccanti vuttacakkhuviññāṇena passitabbanti āha ‘‘iṭṭhārammaṇabhūtā’’ti. Kamanīyāti kāmetabbā. Manaṃ appāyantīti manāpāti āha ‘‘manavaḍḍhanakā’’ti. Piyāyitabbasabhāvā piyarūpā. Kāmūpasaṃhitāti kāmapaṭisaṃyuttā. Ālambitabbatā eva cettha upasaṃhitatāti ‘‘ārammaṇaṃ katvā’’tiādimāha. Taṇhāsaṅkhātā nandī taṇhānandī, na tuṭṭhinandīyeva ‘‘nandiṃ caratī’’tiādīsu viya. Gāmantanti gāmasamīpaṃ. ‘‘Anupacāraṭṭhāna’’nti vatvā taṃ dasseti ‘‘yatthā’’tiādinā.
“在这里”,是配合前引经文而说。而说“除了保留此一教导方式”,是因该义已由“远的”一词所摄。“微声、微音”中,“微”字意为无有、不存。显示巴利原文
Etthāti yathānīhate pāṭhe. ‘‘Imaṃ ekaṃ pariyāyaṃ ṭhapetvā’’ti vuttaṃ tassa ‘‘pantānī’’tipadena saṅgahitattā. Appasaddāni appanigghosānīti ettha appa-saddo abhāvattho.
第六经 三弥提世间问经注显示巴利原文
6. Samiddhilokapañhāsuttavaṇṇanā
68 “从《祈求经》开始”,指的是在弥嘎加喇品中,从第二部经开始。而第一部经则讲述了第二种住处等义。显示巴利原文
68.Āyācanasuttato paṭṭhāyāti migajālavagge dutiyasuttato paṭṭhāya. Paṭhamasutte pana dutiyakavihārādibhāvo vuttoti.
7. 优波先那蛇经注显示巴利原文
7. Upasenaāsīvisasuttavaṇṇanā
69 “握取”:松开披覆的衣服,为仔细观察而解开。“山洞之影”:指前方山洞的阴影处。“跌落”:从山洞顶盖处滑落。“所触之毒”:四种毒蛇中,此指所触之毒,故说“所以”等。“正在被遍取”:即正在耗尽、正在消灭之义。“依于差别”:即依各自毒性的差别程度。“异离”:指舍弃生长等本有状态。“自性离去”:即消亡、坏灭。显示巴利原文
69.Gahetvāti pārupanassa sithilakaraṇena vīmaṃsato mocetvā. Leṇacchāyāyāti purimadisāya leṇacchāyāyaṃ. Patitvāti leṇacchadanato bhassitvā. Phuṭṭhavisoti catūsu āsīvisesu so phuṭṭhaviso. Tenāha ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi. Pariyādiyamānamevāti khepentameva, vināsentamevāti attho. Yathāparicchedenāti attano visaparicchedānurūpaṃ. Aññathābhāvanti vaḍḍhabhāvādipakatijahanaṃ. Sabhāvavigamoti vināso.
8. 《优波婆那现见经》注疏显示巴利原文
8. Upavāṇasandiṭṭhikasuttavaṇṇanā
70 “觉知了别色”:即以遍知智觉知了别。“色贪”:对青、黄等种种色法所起的贪染。“觉知了别”:即了知“我这贪染尚未断除”。由此说明有学者的省察。故说:“优波婆那,如是,法亦为现见的”等。“彻底觉知了别色贪”:即了知“我内在于诸色无有贪染”。这是无学者的省察。显示巴利原文
70.Rūpaṃ paṭisaṃviditaṃ karoti ñātapariññāvasena. Rūparāganti nīlādibhede rūpadhamme rāgaṃ. Paṭisaṃviditaṃ karoti ‘‘ayaṃ me rāgo appahīno’’ti. Etena sekkhānaṃ paccavekkhaṇā kathitā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘evampi kho, upavāṇa, sandiṭṭhiko dhammo hotī’’tiādi. Rūparāgaṃ paṭisaṃviditaṃ karoti ‘‘natthi me ajjhattaṃ rūpesu rāgo’’ti pajānāti. Asekkhānaṃ hāyaṃ paccavekkhaṇā.
9. 《第一六触处经》注疏显示巴利原文
9. Paṭhamachaphassāyatanasuttavaṇṇanā
71 「触之生源」:指六种触的生源与生起之处,即眼等诸处。「我名为实已消亡者」:若有人如实了知六触处的集等道理,他便已修习圆满;若尚未了知,则未圆满,而我正是后者。「此即是」:即于眼处,通过‘这不是我的’等方式,三种执取不复存在。显示巴利原文
71.Phassākarānanti channaṃ phassānaṃ ākarānaṃ uppattiṭṭhānānaṃ, cakkhādīnanti attho. Naṭṭho nāma ahanti vadati, yo channaṃ phassāyatanānaṃ samudayādiṃ yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti, so vusitavā, itaro avusitavā ahañca tādisoti. Ayamevāti ayaṃ cakkhusmiṃ ‘‘netaṃ mamā’’tiādinā tiṇṇaṃ gāhānaṃ abhāvo eva.
10. 《第二六触处经》的注疏显示巴利原文
10. Dutiyachaphassāyatanasuttavaṇṇanā
72 「不再有后有」:即不再有再生。显示巴利原文
72.Apunabbhavoti punabbhavābhāvo.
11. 《第三六触处经》的注疏显示巴利原文
11. Tatiyachaphassāyatanasuttavaṇṇanā
73 此处说「彻底消失」,即确定无疑地消失,意为从根源上彻底消亡。显示巴利原文
73.Panassasanti ekaṃsena naṭṭhoti ayamettha atthoti āha ‘‘atinaṭṭho’’ti, dhurato eva naṭṭhoti attho.
第八 病品显示巴利原文
8. Gilānavaggo
1-5. 第一病经等的注释显示巴利原文
1-5. Paṭhamagilānasuttādivaṇṇanā
74-78 「不知名」:因姓名、族姓以及戒等功德上不为人知,故不知名。由于未达到长老或中位的地位,故称为新学。显示巴利原文
74-78.Appaññātoti nāmagottato ceva sīlādiguṇehi ca appaññāto avissuto. Theramajjhimabhāvaṃ appattatāya navo.
第七、第二无明断经的注释显示巴利原文
7. Dutiyaavijjāpahānasuttavaṇṇanā
80 以无常等为依据的执著,称为「执著」;它超越了法的真实本质而向外抓取,故称为「执取」,这也就是「取」。因为诸行本身即是无常等的本质,故以那样的执著、执取、取来抓取,是不恰当的。诸行正是流转的因,故称为「行相」。在诸行中,由于未遍知的执著而可被见到的“我”的行相,实际上并不存在;另一方面,有“无我”的行相,因此是从其他方面而见。「遍知执著」:即通过审察遍知作出决断后,于认知上产生的邪执著。或者,「遍知执著」就是已遍知的观的执著。「观」:即运用无色七法的观察来了知。显示巴利原文
80. Aniccādivasena abhinivisanaṃ abhiniveso, so eva dhammasabhāvaṃ atikkamitvā parato āmasanato parāmāso, so eva gāho. Tena abhinivesaparāmāsaggāhena gaṇhituṃ na yuttā aniccādisabhāvattā. Saṅkhārā eva pavattiyā kāraṇabhāvato saṅkhāranimittāni. Yo saṅkhāresu apariññātābhinivesena passitabbo attākāro, so na hotīti añño anattākāro, tato aññato passati. Pariññātābhinivesoti tīraṇapariññāya paricchijja ñātamicchābhiniveso. Pariññātābhinivesoti vā pariññātavipassanābhiniveso. Vipassanāti arūpasattakavasena vipassanāya parijānitabbā.
第八、《众多比丘经》注疏显示巴利原文
8. Sambahulabhikkhusuttavaṇṇanā
81 「唯」:指不与其他诸相混杂。显示巴利原文
81.Kevalanti itaralakkhaṇehi avomissaṃ.
《颇求那问经》注疏显示巴利原文
10. Phaggunapañhāsuttavaṇṇanā
83 渴爱被断除时,邪见与慢也必定随之断除,因此说:“由于渴爱的戏论已断,故为戏论已断者。”第二句亦依此理。在这世间,众生的称谓唯依眼等诸根存在而立,因此对于已般涅槃者,其称谓也只是假借眼等而施设,并非另有实指。正因如此,问者欲询问已超越的佛陀所护持的眼、耳等是否尚存,便问:“尊者,有……吗?”若执取眼、耳等的流转,便会令生命在轮回中继续轮转。显示巴利原文
83. Taṇhāya pahīnāya diṭṭhimānāpi pahīnā evāti ‘‘taṇhāpapañcassa chinnattā chinnapapañce’’ti vuttaṃ. Dutiyapadepi eseva nayo. Idha sattavohāro cakkhādīsu vijjamānesu eva hoti, tasmā parinibbutānañca vohāro cakkhādīsu sannissayeneva, nāññathāti atikkantabuddhehi pariharitāni cakkhusotādīni pucchāmīti pucchati ‘‘atthi nu kho bhante’’tiādinā. Cakkhusotādivaṭṭaṃ vaṭṭe pavatteyya.
《坏灭法经》注疏显示巴利原文
1. Palokadhammasuttavaṇṇanā
84 此经仅开示了无常相,而且是以间接的方式开示。当无常相被开示时,由于诸相不相离的缘故,其余苦相与无我相也等同于被开示了。显示巴利原文
84.Aniccalakkhaṇameva kathitaṃ, tañca pariyāyena, aniccalakkhaṇe kathite itaralakkhaṇāni kathitāneva honti byabhicārabhāvato.
《空世间经》注疏显示巴利原文
2. Suññatalokasuttavaṇṇanā
85 “属于我的”即是“我所”,因此说“以自己拥有的东西”。显示巴利原文
85. Attano idanti attaniyanti āha ‘‘attano santakenā’’ti.
3. 《略说法经》释义显示巴利原文
3. Saṃkhittadhammasuttavaṇṇanā
86 应当根据已说的方法来理解:在蕴品中,是以蕴的角度出现;在这里,则是以处的角度出现,仅此差别。显示巴利原文
86.Vuttanayeneva veditabbanti khandhiyavagge khandhavasena āgataṃ, idha āyatanavasenāti ayameva viseso.
4. 《车匿经》释义显示巴利原文
4. Channasuttavaṇṇanā
87 由它从一切相中隐退,故称「隐居」,即果等至。夺命之刀,因其夺取生命,并对众生行杀戮与伤害。「受用」即亲近侍奉。以此表明他依教奉行。显示巴利原文
87. Sabbanimittehi paṭisallīyati etenāti paṭisallānaṃ, phalasamāpatti. Jīvitahārakasatthaṃ jīvitassa haraṇato, sattānañca sasanato hiṃsanato . Paricaritoti payirupāsito. Tena yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjinti dīpeti.
「无过患」即不为他人所指责。此处因未来不再有结生,故说「不再生起」。当他说「这不是我的」等时,是将这些置于阿拉汉果的层面来讲述。他只是在说明凡夫的状态,通过显示尚未完成应作之事来表明。虽然长老把所问的问题放在阿拉汉果上来回答,但说「我没有见到」时,并未说出任何证得,因此需要引出「这也应当注意」,如此便衔接起来了。显示巴利原文
Anupavajjanti parehi na upavaditabbaṃ. Taṃ panettha āyatiṃ appaṭisandhibhāvato hotīti āha ‘‘appavattika’’nti. ‘‘Netaṃ mamā’’tiādīni vadanto arahatte pakkhipitvā kathesi. Puthujjanabhāvameva dīpento vadati akatakiccabhāvadīpanena. Kiñcāpi thero pucchitaṃ pañhaṃ arahatte pakkhipitvā kathesi, ‘‘na samanupassāmī’’ti pana vadanto kiñci nipphattiṃ na kathesi, tasmā ‘‘idampi manasi kātabba’’nti idaṃ ānetvā sambandho.
「烦恼止息」即烦恼热恼的平息。「为有而再有」是渴望一再地存在。于阿赖耶中,喜贪与现起:即在那种被称为「对后有的期待」的阿赖耶中,喜贪生起并达到现起。若此喜贪不存在、没有时,以结生方式从另一世来至此世,称为「来」;以死亡方式从此世离去,称为「去」。契应之去,名为「趣」。这两者皆不存在。死与生:以相续的方式而有死,以结生的方式而有生,这两者亦皆不存在。当如此死与生都不存在时,便「不在此处」,不在世间;「不在彼处」,不在他世。因此,「不在两处」。这个终点——即在此世与他世皆不存在——就是苦的穷尽。「此」即如前所述,在这段经文中,经由代代传承而成为标准的义理。显示巴利原文
Kilesapassaddhīti kilesapariḷāhavūpasamo. Bhavatthāya puna bhavatthāya. Ālayanikanti pariyuṭṭhāneti bhavantare apekkhāsaññite ālaye nikantiyā ca pariyuṭṭhānappattiyā. Asati avijjamānāya. Paṭisandhivasena aññabhavato idhāgamanaṃ āgati nāma. Cutivasena gamananti cavanavasena ito gati. Anurūpagamanaṃ gati nāma tadubhayaṃ na hoti. Cutūpapāto aparāparabhavanavasena cuti, upapajjanavasena upapāto, tadubhayampi na hoti. Evaṃ pana cutūpapāte asati nevidha na idha loke. Na huraṃ na paraloke hoti. Tato eva na ubhayattha hoti. Ayameva anto ayaṃ idhaloke paraloke ca abhāvoyeva dukkhassa pariyosānaṃ. Ayamevāti yathāvutto eva – ettha etasmiṃ pāṭhe paramparāgato pamāṇabhūto attho.
他所说的“有些人”,是就持正说者而言。他们主张有中阴,并认为:“这样,有与有之间的连结才能成立。”但这毫无意义,因为任何所谓的中阴都不存在。事实上,死亡的五蕴灭去之后,紧接着结生五蕴便即现起。因此说“中阴……已被驳斥”。此处,“有”即是存在。在阿毗达摩的《论事》中已被驳斥。既然如此,那“antarena”一词又该如何解释?因此说“antarena”等。“antarena”一词是表示另一种分别,而非指中阴,因为那样的东西根本了不可得,也没有用处。事实上,于异熟识的缘所在之处,便有作为其依止的处所及同时生起的诸蕴;因此,识与其所依一同生起,故不应认为它的生起有远近距离。“不在此处,不在彼处”这两种说法之外,另一种分别“不在两处”,意思也是“不在那里”。或者,“antarena”是与“vinā”(离、无)同义的不变词,因此意思是:不在此,不在彼,亦非离此二处而有。显示巴利原文
Ye panāti sammavādino sandhāya vadati. Antarābhavaṃ icchanti ‘‘evaṃ bhavena bhavantarasambandho yujjeyyā’’ti. Niratthakaṃ antarābhavassa nāma kassaci abhāvato. Cutikkhandhānantarañhi paṭisandhikkhandhānaṃyeva pātubhāvo. Tenāha ‘‘antarābhavassa…pe… paṭikkhittoyevā’’ti. Tattha bhāvoti atthitā. Abhidhamme kathāvatthuppakaraṇe (kathā. 505-507) paṭikkhittoyeva. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘antarenā’’ti idaṃ kathanti āha ‘‘antarenā’’tiādi. Vikappato aññaṃ vikappantaraṃ, tassa dīpanaṃ ‘‘antarenā’’ti vacanaṃ. Na antarābhavadīpanaṃ tādisassa anupalabbhanato payojanābhāvato ca. Yattha hi vipākaviññāṇassa paccayo, tatthassa nissayabhūtassa vatthussa sahabhāvīnañca khandhānaṃ sambhavoti saddhiṃ attano nissayena viññāṇaṃ uppajjatevāti nāssa uppattiyā desadūratā veditabbā. ‘‘Neva idha na hura’’nti vuttadvayato aparaṃ vikappena ‘‘na ubhaya’’nti, tatthapi na hotiyevāti adhippāyo. ‘‘Antarenā’’ti vā ‘‘vinā’’ti iminā samānattho nipāto, tasmā nevidha, na huraṃ, ubhayaṃ vināpi nevāti attho.
“取”(āhari)是以切断的方式执取,因此他说“割断喉管”。“遍观者”(pariggaṇhanto)即正在作意抉择的人。他“般涅槃”,是因为长久以来一直致力于观照。他如此宣说——“车匿比丘无有过失地取了刀”,这就像在无学阶段所作出的记说那样而宣说。显示巴利原文
Āharīti chinnavasena gaṇhi. Tenāha ‘‘kaṇṭhanāḷaṃ chindī’’ti. Pariggaṇhantoti sammasanto. Parinibbuto dīgharattaṃ vipassanāyaṃ yuttapayuttabhāvato. ‘‘Anupavajjaṃ channena bhikkhunā satthaṃ āharita’’nti, kathesīti asekkhakāle byākaraṇaṃ viya katvā kathesi.
“由此”,是指通过“应指责的家族”这句话。“长老”,是指舍利弗长老。“如此”是说:他过去曾与车匿比丘结伴共住,后来证得阿拉汉果,因此对这件事心存疑虑而发问。其余的内容意义浅显。显示巴利原文
Imināti ‘‘upavajjakulānī’’ti iminā vacanena. Theroti sāriputtatthero. Evanti evaṃ pubbakālesu saṃsaṭṭhavihārī hutvā ṭhito pacchā arahattaṃ pāpuṇissatīti āsaṅkanto pucchati. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
5-6. 富楼那经等的注释显示巴利原文
5-6. Puṇṇasuttādivaṇṇanā
88-89 「那」是指眼与色这两者,因此说“眼与色”。「喜集」的意思是:因喜的集——即渴爱与其余的原因,喜的集起、和合称为喜集,故说“从喜集”。所以他说:“以渴爱的和合”。被称为五蕴的苦正是以这样的和合而集起,也就是苦的转起。因此,通过伴随集来显示苦,便说“使轮回达到了顶点”。同样,通过伴随灭,连同灭的方法一起来显示灭,又说“使还灭达到了顶点”。在提问等关联方式中,这并不属于任何一种,因此称为“单独的关联”。显示巴利原文
88-89.Tanti cakkhurūpadvayaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘cakkhuñceva rūpañcā’’ti. Nandisamudayāti nandiyā samudayataṇhāya sesakāraṇehi nandiyā samuditi samodhānaṃ nandisamudayo, tasmā nandisamudayā. Tenāha ‘‘taṇhāya samodhānenā’’ti. Pañcakkhandhasaṅkhātassa dukkhassa samodhānena samuditi pavattiyevāti saha samudayena dukkhassa dassitattā ‘‘vaṭṭaṃ matthakaṃ pāpetvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Nirodhūpāyena saddhiṃ nirodhassa dassitattā ‘‘vivaṭṭaṃ matthakaṃ pāpetvā’’ti. Pucchānusandhiādīsu aññataro na hotīti āha – ‘‘pāṭiyekko anusandhī’’ti.
「凶暴的」意思是易怒的。「恶的」意思是有瞋恚的。「邪恶的」指有罪的。「粗暴的」指残酷的。「以锤矛」是指在一侧安上锤头而制成的短杖。由于伤害众生,所以称为“武器”;又因为能夺取生命,也称为“杀生者”,因此合起来说“武器杀生者”。「调伏」一词,用在根律仪上,是因为调伏了以意为第六的诸根;用在慧上,是因为调伏、平息了与烦恼相伴的法;用在布萨羯磨上,是因为调伏了由身门等生起的不平等;用在忍耐上,是因为调伏、平息了不忍耐——应当这样理解。因此他说:“寂止就是调伏的同义词”。显示巴利原文
Caṇḍāti kodhanā. Duṭṭhāti dosavantoti attho. Kibbisāti pāpā. Kakkhaḷāti dāruṇā. Ghaṭikamuggarenāti ekasmiṃ pakkhe ghaṭikaṃ dassetvā katena rassadaṇḍena. Sattānaṃ sasanato satthaṃ, tato eva jīvitassa haraṇato hārakañcāti satthahārakaṃ. Indriyasaṃvaro ‘‘damo’’ti vutto manacchaṭṭhānaṃ indriyānaṃ damanato. Paññā ‘‘damo’’ti vuttā kilesavisevitānaṃ damanato vūpasamanato. Uposathakammaṃ ‘‘damo’’tivuttaṃ kāyadvārādīhi uppajjanakaasamassa damanato. Khanti ‘‘damo’’ti veditabbā akkhantiyā damanato vūpasamanato. Tenāha ‘‘upasamoti tasseva vevacana’’nti.
「此处」是指在苏那巴兰达地区。「这二位」是说这位富楼那长老和他的弟弟,他们俩是兄弟。「以引发而住立」的意思是:他引发并安住于以佛陀为所缘的殊胜喜悦,站立在那里。「发出七种狮子吼」表明:为了显示即使在面对伤及要害的辱骂、诽谤时也能安然忍受的知足,以及对于手掌打击、土块打击、杖打击、刀打击,乃至被夺取生命也都能安然忍受的知足,他便如此发出了七种狮子吼。因为他曾住在四个地方,所以在经典里没有特别指明住处,只是笼统地说“居住在苏那巴兰达地区”。显示巴利原文
Etthāti sunāparantajanapade. Ete dveti ayaṃ puṇṇatthero tassa kaniṭṭhoti ete dve bhātaro. Āhacca aṭṭhāsi uḷāraṃ buddhārammaṇaṃ pītiṃ uppādetvā. Satta sīhanāde naditvāti mammacchedakānampi akkosaparibhāsānaṃ khamane santosābhāvadīpanaṃ, pāṇippahārassa, leḍḍuppahārassa, daṇḍappahārassa, satthappahārassa, jīvitavoropanassa, khamane santosābhāvadīpanañcāti evaṃ satta sīhanāde naditvā. Catūsu ṭhānesu vasitattā pāḷiyaṃ vasanaṭṭhānaṃ anuddesikaṃ katvā ‘‘sunāparantasmiṃ janapade viharati’’icceva vuttaṃ.
「四处」:指阿布哈塔山、海山寺、马土拉山和木库拉园寺,这四处地方。「登上该经行道」:没有任何比丘能在上面经行,因为大海带来的危难极为巨大,使得修习与作意根本无法顺利进行。「灾异」:指能引发巨大骚动的灾异。「面对面」:指在迎风之处。「告知」:是为了让他们知晓。显示巴利原文
Catūsu ṭhānesūti abbuhatthapabbate, samuddagirivihāre, mātulagirimhi, makuḷakārāmavihāreti imesu catūsu ṭhānesu. Tanti caṅkamaṃ āruyha koci bhikkhu caṅkamituṃ samattho natthi mahatā samuddaparissayena bhāvanāmanasikārassa anabhisambhuṇanato. Uppātikanti uppātakaraṃ mahāsaṅkhobhaṃ uṭṭhapetvā. Sammukheti anilapadese. Paṭivedesunti pavedesuṃ.
「开始之时」:指从建造圆堂、丈量大地的时候开始。「真谛结」:为了凑足五百位(比丘),所以说“差一位便满五百”。「香室」:即祇园大寺的大香室。显示巴利原文
Āraddhakālato paṭṭhāyāti maṇḍalamāḷassa kātuṃ pathavīmitakālato pabhuti. Saccabandhena pañcasatāni paripūretuṃ ‘‘ekūnapañcasatāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Gandhakuṭinti jetavanamahāvihāre mahāgandhakuṭiṃ.
「真谛结名」:因长期住在真谛结山,便获得了“真谛结”的名称。「证得阿拉汉果」:指证得为五神通所围绕的阿拉汉果。因此他说:“他的神通依道而生。”显示巴利原文
Saccabandhanāmoti saccabandhe pabbate ciranivāsitāya ‘‘saccabandho’’tveva laddhanāmo. Arahattaṃ pāpuṇīti pañcābhiññāparivāraṃ arahattaṃ adhigacchi. Tenāha ‘‘maggenevassa abhiññā āgatā’’ti.
当时聚集的大众中,有些是入流者,有些是一来者,有些是不来者,有些是阿拉汉。其中也有三明者、六通者,以及证得无碍解者。正因为如此,才说:“大众的束缚得到了解脱。”而另一些通过皈依、受持五戒或十戒而获得护佑的人,以及诸天,因此说:“佛陀的大轰动发生了。”显示巴利原文
Tasmiṃ sannipatitā mahājanā keci sotāpannā, keci sakadāgāmino, keci anāgāmino, keci arahanto ahesuṃ. Tatthāpi keci tevijjā, keci chaḷabhiññā, keci paṭisambhidappattā ahesuṃ. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘mahājanassa bandhanamokkho jāto’’ti. Ye pana tattha saraṇagamanapañcasīladasasīlasamādānena laddhānuggahā, tesaṃ devatānañca vasena ‘‘mahantaṃ buddhakolāhalaṃ ahosī’’ti vuttaṃ.
然而,他仅在大香室中让黎明出现,这既是为了护助诸天,也是为了诸家族的提升。将人引入恶道的,是这种邪见:“有一个世界的创造者,凭借他而有世间的生灭,因此这些众生便有所归属,他令他们从事于种种业。”持此邪见者又乞求别人来服侍,说:“我应在此久住。”显示巴利原文
Aruṇaṃpana mahāgandhakuṭiyaṃyeva uṭṭhapesi devatānuggahatthañceva kulānudayāya ca. Apāyamagge otārito ‘‘koci lokassa sajitā atthi, tassa vasena pavattisaṃhārā honti, tenevāyaṃ pajā sanāthā hoti, taṃ yuñjati ca tasmiṃ tasmiṃ kamme’’ti micchāgāhehi. Paricaritabbaṃ yāci ‘‘ettha mayā ciraṃ vasitabba’’nti.
“第六”:指《婆醯经》。其义显而易见,因为前文已经阐明。显示巴利原文
Chaṭṭhanti bāhiyasuttaṃ. Taṃ uttānameva heṭṭhā vuttanayattā.
7-8.《第一动经》等注释显示巴利原文
7-8. Paṭhamaejāsuttādivaṇṇanā
90-91 “动”(ejā):指对六种所缘的相(nimitta)生起动摇(kampati),故称为动。因此说“以动摇的意义”。也以逼迫的意义、压迫的意义。“以内瞋的意义”:即在内心(antocitte)中起瞋怒的意义。“以切割的意义”:即斩断的意义。下文所说的内容,在下一篇《断除慢执随应经》中已经出现;而在《断除慢执经》中,所说的方法也是如此。显示巴利原文
90-91. Ejati chaḷārammaṇanimittaṃ kampatīti ejā. Tenāha ‘‘calanaṭṭhenā’’ti. Ābādhanaṭṭhena pīḷanaṭṭhena. Anto dosanaṭṭhenāti antocitte eva padussanaṭṭhena. Nikantanaṭṭhenāti chindanaṭṭhena. Heṭṭhā gahitamevāti heṭṭhā maññitasamugghātasāruppasutte āgatameva. Vuttanayameva maññitasamugghātasutte.
9-10. 《第一双经》等经的注释显示巴利原文
9-10. Paṭhamadvayasuttādivaṇṇanā
92-93 “双”(dvaya)即一对(duka)。经文中为省略重复而作如此指示,因此说“两两部分”。“如是此”(evametanti),即以此无常等性,此眼与色等便是一对“双”。“动摇”(calati),即以不安住而摇摆。“战栗”(byathati),即因老与死而颤抖。它既是因,即作为生起之相。“俱行”(sahagati)指一同转起,由于要借此来把握它,因此“结合”(saṅgati)就是指触(phassa)。这一方法也适用于其余的词对。因为,离开了正在结合之法,名为“结合”的并不存在,同样,集会(sannipāta)与和合(samavāya)也是如此;由它们所产生的触,才被这样称呼。因此,他说“以此”等。显示巴利原文
92-93.Dvayanti dukaṃ. Pāḷiyaṃ āmeḍitalopena niddesoti āha ‘‘dve dve koṭṭhāse’’ti. Evametanti evaṃ aniccādibhāvena etaṃ cakkhurūpañcāti dvayaṃ. Calatīti anavaṭṭhānena pacalati. Byathatīti jarāya maraṇena ca pavedhati. Hetu ceva uppattinimittattā. Sahagatīti sahappavatti, tāya gahetabbattā ‘‘saṅgatī’’ti phasso vutto. Esa nayo sesapadadvayepi. Yasmā ca saṃgacchamānadhammavimuttā saṅgati nāma natthi, tathā sannipātasamavāyā, tesaṃ vasena nibbatto phasso tathā vuccatīti. Tenāha ‘‘iminā’’tiādi.
“依处”(vatthu)指眼,以依止缘等方式作为依处。“所缘”(ārammaṇa)指色,以所缘缘等方式作为所缘。俱生的受等三蕴,以俱生缘等方式存在。这里所说的“此因”(ayaṃ hetu),就是指这三种因。关于“以触”等,此处的简略意义是:在色所缘上,当触在执行其触的作用时,受便如此执行其领纳的作用,想执行其认知的作用;因此,“为触所触”等语句所说的义理,现在为以补特伽罗的立场来显示,而说为“被触”等。世尊以三十种方式说明了五蕴。这是为什么呢?于是他提问“如何”等。就像树枝可以用“树”来称呼一样,在每一个法上,也都可以用“蕴”来称呼。因此世尊说:“识即识蕴”(《双论·蕴双论》2)。显示巴利原文
Vatthūti cakkhu nissayapaccayādibhāvena. Ārammaṇanti rūpaṃ ārammaṇapaccayādibhāvena. Sahajātā tayo khandhā vedanādayo, te sahajātādipaccayabhāvena. Ayaṃ hetūti ayaṃ tividho hetū. Phassenātiādīsu ayaṃ saṅkhepattho – yasmā rūpārammaṇe phasse attano phusanakiccaṃ karonte evaṃ vedanā anubhavanakiccaṃ, saññā sañjānanakiccaṃ karoti, tasmā ‘‘phassena phuṭṭhamevā’’tiādivuttameva atthaṃ idāni puggalādhiṭṭhānena dassetuṃ ‘‘phuṭṭho’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Pañceva khandhā bhagavatā samatiṃsāya ākārehi vuttā. Kasmāti āha ‘‘katha’’ntiādi. Rukkhasākhāsu rukkhavohāro viya ekekadhammepi khandhavohāro hotiyeva. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘viññāṇaṃ viññāṇakkhandho’’ti (yama. khandhayamaka 2).
10. 第六品显示巴利原文
10. Saḷavaggo
1. 《未调伏不守护经》注释显示巴利原文
1. Adantaaguttasuttavaṇṇanā
94 “未调伏”(adamitā):指未达到调伏、不随顺的状态。“不守护”(agopitā):指未被名为“念”的篱笆所保护。“未关闭”(apihitā):指未被名为“念”的门闩所关闭。以此四词,他说明了诸根的无有遮障。“增上承载者”(adhivāhā),意为额外背负者;苦的增上承载者,即“苦重负者”(dukkhādhivāhā)。“地狱的”(nerayikaṃ),指在地狱中生起。而“等”(ādi)一词,则包含了其余的文句。显示巴利原文
94.Adamitāti damaṃ nibbisevanabhāvaṃ anītā. Agopitāti satisaṅkhātāya vatiyā na rakkhitā. Apihitāti satikavāṭena na pihitā. Catūhipi padehi indriyānaṃ anāvaraṇamevāha. Adhikaṃ vahantīti adhivāhā, dukkhassa adhivāhā dukkhādhivāhā. Nirayesu uppajjanakaṃ nerayikaṃ. Ādi-saddena sesapāḷiṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
“Saḷevā”:将cha音变为sa音,插入ḷa音以构成连声。“在那里”(yattha):是表示处所义(nimittattha)的处格(bhummaṃ)。“未漏泄、未浸润”(anavassutā atintā):指未被贪欲所渗透。显示巴利原文
Saḷevāti cha-kārassa sa-kāro, ḷa-kāro padasandhikaro. Yatthāti nimittatthe bhummaṃ. Anavassutā atintāti rāgena atemitā.
「已尝」(assāditaṃ),即已趣向于味。因此他说「具味者」。「乐与苦」(sukhadukkhaṃ),指可意与不可意。「随转」(anvayo),即是因。此随转属于触,故称「触随转」(phassanvayo),也就是他所说的「以触为因」(phassahetukaṃ)。而「不相违」(aviruddho)是以省略格尾的形式来表示的。显示巴利原文
Assāditanti assādaṃ itaṃ upagataṃ. Tenāha ‘‘assādavanta’’nti. Sukhadukkhanti iṭṭhāniṭṭhaṃ. Anvayatīti anvayo, hetu. Phassoti anvayo etassāti phassanvayanti āha – ‘‘phassahetuka’’nti. ‘‘Aviruddha’’iti vibhattilopena niddeso.
「戏论想」(papañcasaññā),指与渴爱等种种戏论交织在一起的想。因此他说:「以烦恼想而成为戏论想」。由于这些众生具有戏论想,故称「戏论想者」(papañcasaññā),即各类众生。「戏论著」(papañcayantā),指在轮回中造作戏论,令其长久延续。「有想者」(saññino),指怀有居家之想的人。「意所成的寻」(manomayaṃ vitakkaṃ),指纯粹由心所生的邪寻。「行动」(irīyati),指践行其威仪。显示巴利原文
Papañcasaññāti taṇhādisamadhūpasaṃhatasaññā. Tenāha ‘‘kilesasaññāya papañcasaññā nāma hutvā’’ti. Papañcasaññā etesaṃ atthīti papañcasaññā, itarītarā narā. Papañcayantāti saṃsāre papañcaṃ cirāyanaṃ karontā. Saññinoti gehassitasaññāya saññāvanto. Manomayaṃ vitakkanti kevalaṃ manasā sambhāvitaṃ micchāvitakkaṃ. Irīyatīti iriyaṃ paṭipattiṃ irīyati paṭipajjati.
「善修习」(suṭṭhu bhāvito),即由此善修习而达到善修习的状态。「被触者的心」(phuṭṭhassa cittaṃ),即其心被如前所述的触所触。「于任何处皆不动摇」(na vikampate kvaci),即于任何可意或不可意的所缘,皆无动摇。「到彼岸者」(pāragā),即令你们成为到彼岸者。显示巴利原文
Suṭṭhu bhāvitoti suṭṭhubhāvaṃ subhāvanaṃ ito bhāvitabhāvito. Phuṭṭhassa cittanti tena yathāvuttaphassena phuṭṭhaṃ assa cittaṃ. Na vikampate kvacīti kismiñci iṭṭhāniṭṭhārammaṇe na kampati. Pāragāti pāragāmino bhavatha.
《摩罗迦子经》注释显示巴利原文
2. Mālukyaputtasuttavaṇṇanā
95 「贬抑」(apasādeti),即呵责。「推崇」(ussādeti),即赞扬。据说这位长老就是摩罗迦子。「放逸之后」(pamajjitvā):意指因未致力于如理作意而放逸。显示巴利原文
95.Apasādetīti tajjeti. Ussādetīti ukkaṃseti. Ayaṃ kira thero mālukyaputto. Pamajjitvāti yonisomanasikārassa ananuyujjanena pamajjitvā.
「Yatra」(在那里)一词,是用于自身的修辞表达。所谓「名」(nāma),在不认可、贬斥的情形中表示否定,而在推重、赞许的情形中则表示肯定。「成了什么」(kiṃ jātaṃ)的意思是:凭那老年之身,他又能成为什么?——他竟视长老身份如草芥,如此说道。因此他说:「如果……(中略)……不顾念」。「不顾念」(anuggaṇhanto),即不如此思惟。「像我这样的人,世尊的教诫实能带来利益」,他这样称赞当下的教诫。显示巴利原文
Yatrāti paccattaṃ vacanālaṅkāre. Nāmāti asambhāvane apasādanapakkhe, ussādanapakkhe pana sambhāvane. Kiṃ jātanti kiṃ tena mahallakabhāvena jātanti mahallakabhāvaṃ tiṇāyapi amaññamāno vadati. Tenāha ‘‘yadi…pe… anuggaṇhanto’’ti. Anuggaṇhantoti acintento. Mādisānaṃ bhagavato ovādo upakārāvahoti etarahi ovādañca pasaṃsanto.
以「未见、以前未曾见过」等,通过假设的方式所作的说明,是为了揭示方法,即「正如在这些之中没有欲等,同样在其余已遍知的法中也无有」,又因那其余的法也应与这些视同一律,所以这样说。因此经中说:「诸欲如梦」(supinakūpamā kāmā)。显示巴利原文
‘‘Adiṭṭhā adiṭṭhapubbā’’tiādinā parikappavasena vuttanidassanaṃ ‘‘yathā etesu chandādayo na honti, evamitaresupi pariññātesū’’ti nayapaṭipajjanatthaṃ, tesampi imehi samānetabbattā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘supinakūpamā kāmā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.234; 2.46; pāci. 417; cūḷava. 65).
“以眼识对所见,仅止于所见”的意思是:眼识对色处的取境行相有多少,就仅仅那么多。其量如何呢?这是自所体验、无法示人的,唯是假名安立之色。因此说“因为眼识……”等。“于色”是说在色处上。“唯色而已”是指仅此色处本身,而非青、黄等差别。此处的“仅”字正是为了遮除这些差别。若如此,那“唯”字又有何用?因为在色处中,眼识虽可取得,但并不会有“这是青,这是黄”等执取。又哪会有常、无常等自性的事物呢?——为了遮除这种疑虑,乃至对已结合者也要遮除,所以采用了“唯”字。因此说“并非恒常等自性”。“其余诸识亦然”是说即使在速行识中也是如此。显示巴利原文
Cakkhuviññāṇena diṭṭhe diṭṭhamattanti cakkhuviññāṇassa rūpāyatanaṃ yattako gahaṇākāro, tattakaṃ. Kittakaṃ pamāṇanti attasaṃvediyaṃ parassa na disitabbaṃ, kappanāmattaṃ rūpaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘cakkhuviññāṇaṃ hī’’tiādi. Rūpeti rūpāyatane. Rūpamattamevāti nīlādibhedaṃ rūpāyatanamattaṃ, na nīlādi. Visesanivattanattho hi ayaṃ matta-saddo. Yadi evaṃ, eva-kāro kimatthiyo? Cakkhuviññāṇañhi rūpāyatane labbhamānampi nīlādivisesaṃ ‘‘idaṃ nīlaṃ nāma, idaṃ pītaṃ nāmā’’ti na gaṇhāti. Kuto niccāniccādisabhāvatthanti saṃhitassapi nivattanatthaṃ evakāraggahaṇaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘na niccādisabhāva’’nti. Sesaviññāṇehipīti javanaviññāṇehipi.
所谓“已见”,是就“眼识对色处的见”而安立的。因此说“于色中的了色识”。“唯眼识而已”的意思是:眼识于色处取境多少,我的心便仅仅安住于那么多——这是它的义理。或者也有读作“以无贪等”的版本。所谓“已见”,从词义上说,即是被眼识所见的色。“即于此”是说在那个被眼识仅见为色的地方。所谓“三心仅止于所见”,其意思是:如同眼识那样,由于无贪等而转起。因此说“正如那样……”等。显示巴利原文
Diṭṭhaṃ nāma cakkhuviññāṇaṃ rūpāyatanassa dassananti katvā. Tenāha ‘‘rūpe rūpavijānana’’nti. Cakkhuviññāṇamattamevāti yattakaṃ cakkhuviññāṇaṃ rūpāyatane gahaṇamattaṃ, taṃmattameva me sabbaṃ cittaṃ bhavissatīti attho. ‘‘Rāgādirahenā’’ti vā pāṭho. Diṭṭhaṃ nāma padatthato cakkhuviññāṇena diṭṭhaṃ rūpaṃ. Tatthevāti cakkhuviññāṇena diṭṭhamatte rūpe. Cittattayaṃ diṭṭhamattaṃ nāma cakkhuviññāṇaṃ viya rāgādivirahena pavattanato. Tenāha ‘‘yathā ta’’nti ādi.
“已了知”,是指以意门转向所了知的所缘,这是从“应以无贪等来了知”的角度而言。因此说“如同以转向……”等。显示巴利原文
Manodvārāvajjanenaviññātārammaṇaṃ viññātanti adhippetaṃ rāgādivirahena viññeyyato. Tenāha ‘‘yathā āvajjanenā’’tiādi.
“那时”意指在那个时刻,而非从那以后——这是此处所要表达的意思。以“仅止于所见”等所要遮除的贪等,在此处被“彼”字回指,故说“被那贪所染……”等。“于彼处”是处格,表领域;而领域的状态,须通过与具有领域者的关系来理解,因此说“被系缚……”等。显示巴利原文
Tadāti tasmiṃ kāle, na tato paṭṭhāyāti ayamettha atthoti dasseti. ‘‘Diṭṭhamatta’’ntiādinā yesaṃ rāgādīnaṃ nivattanaṃ adhippetaṃ, te ‘‘tenā’’ti ettha ta-saddena paccāmasīyantīti ‘‘tena rāgena vā ratto’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti visaye bhummaṃ, visayabhāvo ca visayinā sambandhavasena icchitabboti vuttaṃ ‘‘paṭibaddho’’tiādi.
“念”是指对色法如其自性而随观的念。由于忘失念时对喜爱相作意,念便不生起,故念不显现、不转起。“执著”意为“牢牢地执取”,即吞下、彻底消化并确认后,将其执为我所。显示巴利原文
Satīti rūpassa yathāsabhāvasallakkhaṇā sati muṭṭhā piyanimittamanasikārena anuppajjanato na dissati nappavattati. Ajjhosāti ajjhosāya. Gilitvā pariniṭṭhapetvā attaniyakaraṇena.
“贪欲与害”是以工具格独立词形式出现,故说“以贪欲,以害”。又依据义理而转变了格的形式,故说“以贪欲和害等”。“累积者”指正在令其增长者。“具念者”指具足正念者,于一切处皆与念相应。至于“及随顺者”中的“及”字与“亦”字,它们仅为不变词,故直接表达为“对于随顺者”。显示巴利原文
Abhijjhā ca vihesā cāti karaṇatthe paccattavacananti āha – ‘‘abhijjhāya ca vihesāya cā’’ti. Atthavasena vibhattipariṇāmoti āha – ‘‘abhijjhāvihesāhī’’ti. Ācinantassāti vaḍḍhentassa. Paṭissatoti patissato sabbattha satiyā yutto. Sevato cāpīti ettha ca-saddo api-saddo ca nipātamattanti ‘‘sevantassa’’icceva attho vutto.
3. 《退失经》的注疏显示巴利原文
3. Parihānasuttavaṇṇanā
96 “衰退性”:指从无过失的善法中退堕的性质。“被征服”:指以无法再受用的方式被征服。“自寻思”:指心于种种所缘境不能安住而生起的种种寻思。“应被结缚的”:指应被结缚的所缘。因为一再给予结缚生起的机会,这便名为忍受烦恼的种类。烦恼本身就是烦恼的种类。而在心中执取所缘,就称为忍受。并非通过舍断欲贪来舍弃所缘,而是以烦恼不再生起的法性而舍弃。所谓“被征服的处”,是依于“忍受”等道理而说的。世尊先问法:“诸比丘,什么是衰退法呢?”接着以“如果那位比丘忍受那个所缘”等开示,透过补特伽罗,以补特伽罗为立足点,来说明此法义。显示巴利原文
96.Parihānasabhāvanti anavajjadhammehi parihāyanasabhāvaṃ. Abhibhavitānīti abhibhūtāni nibbisevanabhāvākārena. Sarasaṅkappāti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ visaye anavaṭṭhitabhāvena saṅkappā. Saṃyojaniyāti saṃyojetabbā. Saṃyojanānañhi punappunaṃ uppattiyā okāsaṃ dento kilesajātaṃ adhivāseti nāma. Kileso eva kilesajātaṃ. Ārammaṇaṃ pana citte karonto adhivāseti nāma. Chandarāgappahānena na pajahati ārammaṇaṃ, kilesaṃ pana anuppattidhammatāpādanena eva. Abhibhavitaṃ āyatananti kathitaṃ adhivāsanādinā. ‘‘Kathañca, bhikkhave, parihānadhammo hotī’’ti dhammaṃ pucchitvā taṃ vibhajantena bhagavatā ‘‘tañce bhikkhu adhivāsetī’’tiādinā puggalena puggalādhiṭṭhānena dhammo dassito.
4. 《放逸住者经》的注疏显示巴利原文
4. Pamādavihārīsuttavaṇṇanā
97 “未关闭眼根”:指未加防护、未加遮蔽眼根而安住者。“浇洒”:指被烦恼特加浇洒。“为烦恼所浸渍”:指被烦恼所漏泄。“弱喜”:指柔弱、尚未达到强大有力的喜。“强喜”:指已生起惊惧感并遍满全身的喜。“除恼轻安”:指具有止息身心燥扰特征的轻安。那些喜与轻安不生起,是由于其生起之缘的相续未能成就。世尊先以“诸比丘,什么是放逸住者?”问及补特伽罗,随后又通过“无有欢悦,欢悦生起”等说法,以“放逸住者”与“不放逸住者”的法义来阐明补特伽罗。显示巴利原文
97.Napidahitvā cakkhundriyaṃ na pidahitvā sañchāditvā ṭhitassa. Byāsiñcatīti kilesehi visesena āsiñcati. Kilesatintanti kilesehi avassutaṃ. Dubbalapīti taruṇā na balappattā. Balavapīti ubbegā pharaṇappattā ca pīti. Darathappassaddhīti kāyacittadarathavūpasamalakkhaṇā passaddhi. Na uppajjanti paccayaparamparāya asiddhattā. ‘‘Kathañca, bhikkhave, pamādavihārī hotī’’tiādinā puggalaṃ pucchitvā ‘‘pāmojjaṃ na hoti, pāmojjaṃ jāyatī’’tiādinā ca, dhammena ‘‘pamādavihārī appamādavihārī’’ti ca puggalo dassito.
5. 《抑制经》的注疏显示巴利原文
5. Saṃvarasuttavaṇṇanā
98 “此”是指“诸比丘,云何为非防护?”这句话。这是依应断法的宣说而说,即仅仅宣说应断之法。世尊先以“诸比丘,如何是非防护者?”问法,随后以“诸比丘,有眼所识之色”等,纯粹开示法义。显示巴利原文
98.Idanti ‘‘kathañca, bhikkhave, asaṃvaro’’ti? Idaṃ vacanaṃ. Pahātabbadhammakkhānavasenāti pahātabbadhammasseva kathanaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Kathañca, bhikkhave, asaṃvaro hotī’’ti dhammaṃ pucchitvā ‘‘santi, bhikkhave, cakkhuviññeyyā rūpā’’tiādinā dhammova vibhatto.
《定经》注释。显示巴利原文
6. Samādhisuttavaṇṇanā
99 “心一境性”指依止而得的心一境性。“衰退时”指由于未获得它而衰退时。“业处”指观业处,或仅指止本身。显示巴利原文
99.Cittekaggatāyāti samathavasena cittekaggatāya. Parihāyamāneti tassa alābhena parihāyamāne. Kammaṭṭhānanti vipassanākammaṭṭhānaṃ, samathameva vā.
第7《隐居经》注疏显示巴利原文
7. Paṭisallānasuttavaṇṇanā
100 “业处”指止与观的修行业处。显示巴利原文
100.Kammaṭṭhānanti samathavipassanākammaṭṭhānaṃ.
《第一等汝等经》等的注释显示巴利原文
8-9. Paṭhamanatumhākaṃsuttādivaṇṇanā
101-102 “运用譬喻”意为借助譬喻来说明。“以纯粹方式”指离开譬喻,唯独显示法本身。显示巴利原文
101-102.Upamaṃ parivāretvāti upamaṃ pariharitvā. Suddhikavasenāti upamāya vinā kevalameva.
第10《水经》注疏显示巴利原文
10. Udakasuttavaṇṇanā
103 “水”是那个人的名字。“吠陀”指智慧。“胜一切者”意为已战胜一切。“插入的”指埋入者。“应遮蔽的法”指具有应被遮蔽的性质。“应压碎的法”指具有应被压碎的性质。“被保护的”指已受保护者。原本应说“给予米饭、凝乳食品、菜肴、遮蔽、压碎的人”。但因这里只取“遮蔽”或“压碎”之义,故未采用那种说法。显示巴利原文
103.Udakoti tassa nāmaṃ. Vedaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Sabbaṃ jitavāti sabbaji. Avakhatanti nikhataṃ. Ucchādanadhammoti ucchādetabbasabhāvo. Parimaddanadhammoti parimadditabbasabhāvo. Parihatoti pariharito. Odanakummāsūpacayucchādanaparimaddanapadehīti vattabbaṃ. Ucchādanaṃ vā parimaddanamattamevāti katvā na gahitaṃ.
第 11 品·瑜伽安稳品 (Yogakkhemivaggo)显示巴利原文
11. Yogakkhemivaggo
1. 《安稳者经》注释显示巴利原文
1. Yogakkhemisuttavaṇṇanā
104 “以四种轭”指以欲轭等四种轭。“安稳者”指具足安稳、善巧的人。“作为原因”指对于应作的方法,它成为原因。“法门”:因为能使人了知流转与还灭,所以称为“法门”;又因为这个法是教法,所以也是“法门”,因此称为“法门”,即指这个法门。然而,由于这个法门是证得安稳的原因,故说“法因”。“相应的”指与止观相应的诸法,或指与四谛相应的诸法。提取出“因此”一词之后,问:“为什么?”并分析:“是因宣说呢,还是因舍断?”然而,因为欲贪的舍断才是成为安稳者的原因,而非宣说,所以回答说“因舍断”等。显示巴利原文
104.Catūhiyogehīti kāmayogādīhi catūhi yogehi. Kheminoti khemavato kusalino. Kāraṇabhūtanti kattabbaupāyassa kāraṇabhūtaṃ. Pariyāyati pavattiṃ nivattiñca ñāpetīti pariyāyo, dhammo ca so pariyattidhammattā pariyāyo cāti dhammapariyāyo, taṃ dhammapariyāyaṃ. Yasmā pana so tassādhigamassa kāraṇaṃ hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘dhammakāraṇa’’nti. Yuttinti samathavipassanādhammānīti vā catusaccadhammānīti vā. ‘‘Tasmā’’ti padaṃ uddharitvā – ‘‘kasmā’’ti kāraṇaṃ pucchanto ‘‘kiṃ akkhātattā, udāhu pahīnattā’’ti vibhajitvā pucchi. Yasmā pana chandarāgappahānaṃ yogakkhemibhāvassa kāraṇaṃ, na kathanaṃ, tasmā ‘‘pahīnattā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
2-10. 《取经》等注释显示巴利原文
2-10. Upādāyasuttādivaṇṇanā
105-113 “受乐苦”:即所谓“受”的乐与苦,已经讲述。由于经中说“内乐苦”,并讲了解脱之乐与六处之苦,因此可知,出离之乐在此也同样述及。尽管《蕴相应品》是依蕴而作开示,而非依处,但此处所要阐述的义理,与《蕴相应品》所说的方式是一样的。显示巴利原文
105-113.Vedanāsukhadukkhanti vedanāsaṅkhātaṃ sukhañca dukkhañca kathitaṃ. ‘‘Ajjhattaṃ sukhaṃ dukkha’’nti vuttattā vimuttisukhassa ca saḷāyatanadukkhassa ca kathitattā vivaṭṭasukhaṃ cettha kathitamevāti sakkā viññātuṃ. Kāmaṃ khandhiyavagge khandhavasena desanā āgatā, na āyatanavasena. Ettha pana vattabbaṃ atthajātaṃ khandhiyavagge vuttanayamevāti.
12. 世间欲品显示巴利原文
12. Lokakāmaguṇavaggo
1-2. 《第一魔罗套索经》等注释显示巴利原文
1-2. Paṭhamamārapāsasuttādivaṇṇanā
114-115 “居住”:烦恼魔居于此处,故称“住处”,即五欲的内外诸处。进入了烦恼魔的住处,便落其掌控之中。“三种”:指名为戏论想的三种魔。由此可知,也已落入天子魔的掌控。显示巴利原文
114-115. Āvasati ettha kilesamāroti āvāso. Kāmaguṇaajjhattikabāhirāni āyatanāni. Kilesamārassa āvāsaṃ gato vasaṃ gato. Tividhassāti papañcasaññāsaṅkhātassa tividhassapi mārassa. Tato eva devaputtamārassapi vasaṃ gatoti sakkā viññātuṃ.
3.《世界边际经》注疏显示巴利原文
3. Lokantagamanasuttavaṇṇanā
116 这里,“世间”指有情、草木山川等存续之处,即轮围世界。“行”则因具有不断破坏、毁坏之义,也称作“世间”。“边际”即终点、尽头。“与一切知智对照”的意思是:以一切知智的运作方式,将所述内容加以比对,使彼此不相违、彼此吻合。“我称赞”即我加以赞叹。显示巴利原文
116. Lokiyanti ettha sattakāyabhūtagāmādīti loko, cakkavāḷo. Saṅkhāro pana lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena loko. Antanti osānaṃ. Sabbaññutaññāṇena saṃsanditvāti sabbaññutaññāṇagatiyā samānetvā avirodhetvā. Thomessāmīti pasaṃsissāmi.
“具有如是成就”:即“具有这样的了知、应被这样看见”,这是我的请求。因此他说“就是如此”,即此义。“了知者了知”:世尊以一切知智,如实了知一切所应了知。因为安住于部分智慧的人,无法了知一切所应了知。此“了知”一词,通过最高规格的表述与不加简择的整体把握,涵盖了无余的一切所知种类,故与此认知相应的,唯有作为其工具的一切知智。同时,依据本论行文及与“世尊”紧密关联的语境,也应阐发此义。“见应见者”:即以天眼、慧眼、法眼、佛眼、普眼这五种总称为智眼的眼,如实照见所应见的对象。或者,也可这样理解:“了知者了知”,不同于那些存有颠倒、自称遍知欲界与色界之人,他们虽有所认知,却是被颠倒所扭曲的认知。世尊则不然,他已彻底断除颠倒,故作为了知者而正了知;由于无有错谬之见现前,故作为见者而正见。这便是“了知者了知,见者见应见者”。显示巴利原文
Evaṃsampattikanti evaṃsampajjanakaṃ evaṃpassitabbaṃ idaṃ mama ajjhesanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘īdisanti attho’’ti. Jānaṃ jānātīti sabbaññutaññāṇena jānitabbaṃ jānāti eva. Na hi padesaññāṇe ṭhito jānitabbaṃ sabbaṃ jānāti. Ukkaṭṭhaniddesena hi avisesaggahaṇena ca ‘‘jāna’’nti iminā niravasesaṃ ñeyyajātaṃ pariggayhatīti tabbisayāya jānanakiriyāya sabbaññutaññāṇameva karaṇaṃ bhavituṃ yuttaṃ. Pakaraṇavasena ‘‘bhagavā’’ti padasannidhānena ca ayamattho vibhāvetabbo. Passitabbameva passatīti dibbacakkhu-paññācakkhu-dhammacakkhu-buddhacakkhu-samantacakkhu-saṅkhātehi ñāṇacakkhūhi passitabbaṃ passati eva. Atha vā jānaṃ jānātīti yathā aññe savipallāsā kāmarūpapariññāvādino jānantāpi vipallāsavasena jānanti, na evaṃ bhagavā. Bhagavā pana pahīnavipallāsattā jānanto jānāti eva, diṭṭhidassanassa abhāvā passanto passati evāti attho.
“以引导见的作用而成为眼”:如同眼引导、成就众生的视觉,世尊也因成就对世间的如实知见,以引导见的作用而成为眼;或因他是慧眼所成,即依自生智成就、证得慧眼,故为成为眼者。“成为智者”也以同样方式理解。或者,诸菩提分法,他依这些法而生起,也令世间生起这些法,或证得不与他者共通的独特法,故为成为法者。道智于最胜义上称为梵,他依此而生起,也令世间生起此,且以自生智证得,故为成为梵者。他宣说四圣谛法,故为宣说者。他长久地令对真理的证悟持续流转并宣说,故为流转者。引出义,即抽取出苦等义;或令成就第一义,即涅槃。他令众生中生起对不死的亲证,施予不死,故为不死的施与者。因菩提分法归属于他,故为法主。一再令人祈请,使之变为郑重,即作尊重想;同样,使之成为难解之后方予宣说,也是如此。显示巴利原文
Dassanapariṇāyakaṭṭhenāti yathā cakkhu sattānaṃ dassanatthaṃ pariṇeti sādheti, evaṃ lokassa yāthāvadassanasādhanatopi dassanakiccapariṇāyakaṭṭhena cakkhubhūto, paññācakkhumayattā vā sayambhūñāṇena paññācakkhuṃ bhūto pattoti vā cakkhubhūto. Ñāṇabhūtoti etassa ca evameva attho daṭṭhabbo. Dhammā vā bodhipakkhiyā, tehi uppannattā lokassa ca taduppādanato anaññasādhāraṇaṃ vā dhammaṃ patto adhigatoti dhammabhūto. ‘‘Brahmā’’vuccati seṭṭhaṭṭhena maggañāṇaṃ, tena uppannattā lokassa ca taduppādanato tañca sayambhūñāṇena pattoti brahmabhūto. Catusaccadhammaṃ vadatīti vattā. Ciraṃ saccapaṭivedhaṃ pavattento vadatīti pavattā. Atthaṃ nīharitvāti dukkhādiatthaṃ uddharitvā. Paramatthaṃ vā nibbānaṃ pāpayitā. Amatasacchikiriyaṃ sattesu uppādento amataṃ dadātīti amatassa dātā. Bodhipakkhiyadhammānaṃ tadāyattabhāvato dhammassāmī. Punappunaṃ yācāpento bhāriyaṃ karonto garuṃ karoti nāma, tathā duviññeyyaṃ katvā kathentopi.
当眼存在时,便有‘世间’想;若无眼,则无。因为若无内处,即无世间的假名。因此说‘眼即是世间’等。未断见者,即未破除有身见者,无法对整体与个别作分析,便将部分如同整体,想为‘世间’且执为‘世间’。‘如是’一词引出了‘想为世间且执为世间’这三句。‘其’指凡夫,或指轮围世间。因为凡夫正是把眼等连同其所依之处,一起想为‘轮围’。以步行,即用脚行走。不能到达,因为它们是无穷尽的。以坏灭义而言:这是依行作世间而说,为显示世间的边际。其边际即是涅槃。涅槃是可以到达的,因为可通过正道证得。至于轮围世间,则没有边际,因为无法以步行到达。显示巴利原文
Cakkhunā vijjamānena lokasaññī hoti, na tasmiṃ asati. Na hi ajjhattikāyatanavirahena lokasamaññā atthi. Tenāha ‘‘cakkhuñhi loko’’tiādi. Appahīnadiṭṭhīti asamūhatasakkāyadiṭṭhiko ghanavinibbhogaṃ kātuṃ asakkonto samudāyaṃ viya avayavaṃ ‘‘loko’’ti sañjānāti ceva maññati ca. Tathāti iminā ‘‘lokoti sañjānāti ceva maññati cā’’ti padattayaṃ ākaḍḍhati. Tassāti puthujjanassa, cakkavāḷalokassa vā. Cakkhādimeva hi sahokāsena ‘‘cakkavāḷo’’ti puthujjano sañjānāti. Gamanenāti padasā gamanena. Na sakkā tesaṃ anantattā. Lujjanaṭṭhenāti abhisaṅkhāralokavasena lokassa antaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Tassa anto nāma nibbānaṃ. Taṃ pattuṃ sakkā sammāpaṭipattiyā pattabbattā. Cakkavāḷalokassa pana anto nāma, natthi tassa gamanena appattabbattā.
以这些词,即通过这些划分文句的词。而这些词的特征即是字母的集合,故说‘以字母聚合’。以各别字母,指在各个词当中,依各自固定的排列方式,被心识一一分别执取的字母。显示巴利原文
Imehi padehīti imehi vākyavibhāgehi padehi. Tāni pana akkharasamudāyalakkhaṇānīti āha ‘‘akkharasampiṇḍanehī’’ti. Pāṭiyekkaakkharehīti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ pade paṭiniyatasannivesehi visuṃ visuṃ cittena gayhamānehi akkharehīti attho.
以通达之义,‘paṇḍā’被称为慧。依此慧,由此达彼而证得者,即是贤者、具慧者。大慧应从无碍解的角度来理解,故说‘大义’等。‘如同’一词,在第一种解释中仅为语助词;在第二种解释中则是回指,故说‘那已作了解释’。显示巴利原文
Gamanaṭṭhena ‘‘paṇḍā’’ vuccati paññā, tāya ito gato pattoti paṇḍito, paññavā. Mahāpaññatā nāma paṭisambhidāvasena veditabbāti āha ‘‘mahante atthe’’tiādi. Yathā tanti ettha tanti nipātamattaṃ paṭhamavikappe, dutiyavikappe pana paccāmasananti āha ‘‘taṃ byākata’’nti.
四、《五欲经》的注疏解释。显示巴利原文
4. Kāmaguṇasuttavaṇṇanā
117 Cetaso:是依格用作属格。所谓以心触,即是体验,故说“曾以心体验”。顺应三季之宜,便有三座殿堂,依此而有三种戏剧的分类。仅凭心意愉悦这一点,便将它们示现为五欲功德,而非出于对欲的贪著。因为自从出家之后,菩萨心中便从未再生起过任何欲的寻思。因此,魔王波旬说——显示巴利原文
117.Cetasoti karaṇe sāmivacanaṃ. Cittena saṃphusanaṃ nāma anubhavoti āha ‘‘cittena anubhūtapubbā’’ti. Ututtayānurūpatāvasena pāsādattayaṃ, taṃ vasena tividhanāṭakabhedo. Manorammatāmattena kāmaguṇaṃ katvā dassitaṃ, na kāmavasena. Na hi abhinikkhamanato uddhaṃ bodhisattassa kāmavitakkā bhūtapubbā. Tenāha māro pāpimā –
“七年之中,我紧随世尊,步步不离;
对于具足正念的正自觉者,我未曾寻得任何可乘之隙。”(《经集》448)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Satta vassāni bhagavantaṃ, anubandhiṃ padāpadaṃ; Otāraṃ nādhigacchissaṃ, sambuddhassa satīmato’’ti. (su. ni. 448);
所谓“慈氏”等名号,仅是显示未来所缘,并非菩萨生起如此之想。“attā”为可亲爱之相,故称“attarūpo”,后分句中前分被省略,因此表达了“为自利而希求成就者”之义。又,所谓“attarūpena”,是指被喜与悦所执受之本质,即欢喜踊跃、兴高采烈的状态。“不放逸”指在善法上无懈怠、无缺失,“持续精勤”即为此义。“无放舍”指心于五欲不抓取、不沉溺。前一种解释是就修习善法而言,后一种是就断除不善法而言。“二法”即不放逸与念。借此不放逸与念,当知那四种善法聚得以生起。“应作”即应当修习。显示巴利原文
Metteyyo nāmātiādi anāgatārammaṇadassanamattaṃ, na bodhisattassa evaṃ uppajjatīti. Attā piyāyitabbarūpo etassāti attarūpo, uttarapade purimapadalopenāti ‘‘attano hitakāmajātikenā’’ti attho vutto. Attarūpenāti vā pītisomanassehi gahitasabhāvena tuṭṭhapahaṭṭhena udaggudaggena. Appamādoti appamajjanaṃ kusaladhammesu akhaṇḍakāritāti āha ‘‘sātaccakiriyā’’ti. Avossaggoti cittassa kāmaguṇesu avossajjanaṃ pakkhandituṃ appadānaṃ. Purimo vikappo kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ karaṇavasena dassito, pacchimo akusalānaṃ akaraṇavasena. Dve dhammāti appamādo satīti dve dhammā. Appamādo sati ca tathā pavattā cattāro kusaladhammakkhandhā veditabbā. Kattabbāti pavattetabbā.
于彼处:即于名为涅槃的那个因的证悟中。那个因:即六处之因。六处于此灭尽,故说六处之灭尽为涅槃。由此说“涅槃,即指此”等。于涅槃:即在涅槃中。显示巴利原文
Tasmiṃ āyataneti tasmiṃ nibbānasaññite kāraṇe paṭivedhe. Taṃ kāraṇanti channaṃ āyatanānaṃ kāraṇaṃ. Saḷāyatanaṃ nirujjhati etthāti saḷāyatananirodho vuccati nibbānaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘nibbānaṃ. Taṃ sandhāyā’’tiādi. Nibbānasminti nibbānamhi.
五-六、《帝释问经》等的释义显示巴利原文
5-6. Sakkapañhasuttādivaṇṇanā
118-119 “所见”指现前。“法”指取蕴法。因于此中,生起“我”之想与见,即是有身之想,故说:“于现法”即是在此有身之中。“依彼”中的“彼”,即指前文以欢喜等异门所执取的爱,故说为“依爱”。“彼执取”即此爱之执取,亦是此爱之取。第六项因第五项已明其理则,故其义显然。显示巴利原文
118-119.Diṭṭheti paccakkhabhūte. Dhammeti upādānakkhandhadhamme. Tattha hi attāti bhavati saññā diṭṭhi cāti attabhāvasaññā. Tenāha – ‘‘diṭṭhevadhammeti imasmiṃyeva attabhāve’’ti. ‘‘Tannissita’’nti ettha taṃ-saddena heṭṭhā abhinandanādipariyāyena vuttā taṇhā paccāmaṭṭhāti āha – ‘‘taṇhānissita’’nti. Taṃ upādānaṃ etassāti tadupādānaṃ. Tenāha – ‘‘taṃgahaṇa’’ntiādi. Taṇhupādānasaṅkhātaṃ gahaṇaṃ etassāti taṃgahaṇaṃ. Chaṭṭhaṃ uttānameva pañcame vuttanayattā.
七、《舍利弗同住弟子经》释义显示巴利原文
7. Sāriputtasaddhivihārikasuttavaṇṇanā
120 “将连接”(Ghaṭessati)指将建立前后相续的关联。“断灭”(Viccheda),是指由梵行的障碍之缘生起而导致的断灭。显示巴利原文
120.Ghaṭessatīti pubbenāparaṃ ghaṭitaṃ sambandhaṃ karissati. Vicchedanti brahmacariyassa virodhipaccayasamuppattiyā ucchedaṃ.
八、《罗睺罗教诫经》释义显示巴利原文
8. Rāhulovādasuttavaṇṇanā
121 那些若被正确修习、反复修习,便能导向解脱、导向证知阿罗汉果的法,即是指信等资粮——令解脱成熟者。“令成熟”(Paripācenti)指令其达到成熟、达到转变。“法”(Dhammā)指作为原因的法。“依清净因之力”(Visuddhikāraṇavasenāti)即依作为清净因之力;而此清净,即是从信根等之因来说的清净。如同出身高贵的刹帝利青年,由其远离异己、摄受亲党及所处地位的成就而得以清净,应当如此理解。为说明这一点,他说了“因此已说”等语。显示巴利原文
121. Ye dhammā sammadeva bhāvitā bahulīkatā vimuttiyā arahattassa sacchikiriyāya saṃvattanti, te saddhādayo sambhārā vimuttiparipācaniyāti adhippetā. Paripācentīti paripākaṃ pariṇāmaṃ gamenti. Dhammāti kāraṇabhūtā dhammā. Visuddhikāraṇavasenāti visuddhikāraṇatāvasena, sā pana saddhindriyādīnaṃ kāraṇato visuddhi. Yathā nāma jātisampannassa khattiyakumārassa vipakkhavigamena pakkhasaṅgahena pavattiṭṭhānasampattiyā ca parisuddhi hoti, evamevaṃ daṭṭhabbāti dassento ‘‘vuttaṃ heta’’ntiādimāha.
无信之人等只会导致信等诸根的衰损,而信等诸根则是唯为圆满。同样地,对能令净信的经典等的随观也是如此。能令净信的经典,是指《能令净信经》等。“正勤”(Sammappadhāne)指《正勤经》。“念处”(Satipaṭṭhāne)指四念处。“禅那解脱”(Jhānavimokkhe)指关于禅那与解脱的经典。“甚深智行”(Gambhīrañāṇacariye)指与蕴、处、界、缘起相关的经典。显示巴利原文
Assaddhādayopi puggalā saddhādīnaṃ yāvadeva parihānāya honti, saddhādayo pāripūriyāva, tathā pasādaniyasuttantādipaccavekkhaṇā, pasādaniyasuttantā nāma sampasādanīyasuttādayo. Sammappadhāneti sammappadhānasuttante. Satipaṭṭhāneti cattāro satipaṭṭhāne. Jhānavimokkheti jhānāni ceva vimokkhe ca uddissa pavattasuttante. Gambhīrañāṇacariyeti khandhāyatanadhātupaṭiccasamuppādapaṭisaṃyuttasuttante.
「善知识等」是指善知识、戒防护、损减谈、精进发勤、决择慧这五法,也就是《自说经》(Udā.31)中所说“于此,弥醯,比丘有善知识”等。「观察世间」是指世尊见具寿罗睺罗及那些天神的诸根已经成熟。由此,他将前往盲林,在那里日间安住,将会有大集会。因为经中将如此说:“所谓‘若干’,依计算并无界限。”显示巴利原文
Kalyāṇamittatādayoti kalyāṇamittatā sīlasaṃvaro abhisallekhakathā vīriyārambho nibbedhikapaññāti ime kalyāṇamittādayo pañca dhammā, ye ‘‘idha, meghiya, bhikkhu kalyāṇamitto hotī’’tiādinā udāne (udā. 31) kathitā. Lokaṃ volokentassāti āyasmato rāhulassa tāsañca devatānaṃ indriyaparipākaṃ passantassa. Tato yena andhavanaṃ, tattha divāvihārāya mahāsamāgamo bhavissatīti. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘ettakāti gaṇanāvasena paricchedo natthī’’ti.
依止于树与山而住于地者,是地居;行于空中而住于宫殿者,是虚空居。「法眼」当知即四圣谛法,约见义而说。显示巴利原文
Rukkhapabbatanissitā bhūmaṭṭhakā, ākāsacārivimānavāsino antalikkhaṭṭhakā. Dhammacakkhunti veditabbāni catusaccadhammānaṃ dassanaṭṭhena.
第十三 居士品显示巴利原文
13. Gahapativaggo
一至三 毗舍离经等的注疏显示巴利原文
1-3. Vesālīsuttādivaṇṇanā
124-126 “于二”(dvīsu)意指:在此居士品中,第一、第二和第三经所阐释的义理,仅在文句读法上有所不同,并无前所未说的新义。显示巴利原文
124-126.Dvīsūti imasmiṃ gahapativagge paṭhamadutiyesu tatiye ca vuttatthameva pāṭhajātaṃ apubbaṃ natthīti attho.
四至五 婆罗堕阇经等的注疏显示巴利原文
4-5. Bhāradvājasuttādivaṇṇanā
127-128 其他出家人也都是在适当之时托钵乞食,而此人却是个贪食者,正是为了显示他因此而出家,故说“托钵”等。“或者摩擦而置”(Ghaṃsantovā)指将钵在地上摩擦着放置。“已尽”(Parikkhīṇa)指从四周彻底穷尽。葫芦钵等的出现,是因为禁止放置多余的钵,故不接受其他钵。“根修习”:有人说,是指眼等五根的修习,其意为:在作观专注之后,增长上位的观。另有人说:“以信等五根之力修习作观,依于其乐,成就神通与断除之力而修习根。”显示巴利原文
127-128. Kāmaṃ aññepi pabbajitā yuttakāle piṇḍaṃ ulamānā carantiyeva, ayaṃ pana odarito, teneva kāraṇena pabbajitoti dassento ‘‘piṇḍaṃ ulamāno’’tiādimāha. Ghaṃsantovāti bhūmiyaṃ ghaṃsanto eva pattaṃ ṭhapeti. Parikkhīṇanti samantato parikkhīṇaṃ. Nāḷiko …pe… jātaṃ, atirekapattaṭṭhapanassa paṭikkhittattā aññaṃ na gaṇhāti. ‘‘Indriyabhāvananti cakkhādipañcindriyabhāvana’’nti keci vadanti, tathā vipassanābhinivesaṃ katvā uparivipassanaṃ vaḍḍhitvāti adhippāyo. Apare pana ‘‘saddhāpañcamānaṃ indriyānaṃ vasena vipassanābhinivesaṃ katvā tena sukhena abhiññāpahānānaṃ sampādanavasena indriyaṃ bhāvetvā’’ti vadanti.
“近前”(Upasaṅkamati):为说明那国王是如何近前的,故从其到来开始叙述,说“据说长老”等。“大饮”(Mahāpāna)指不做其他事,耽于饮酒,七天中让相关随从饮用烈酒,因此他说“大饮名为饮酒”。“用红莲稻壳”指用红色稻壳。“如被燃烧”指由蚁咬等所生的苦受。“以口箭射之”是由于宠爱所致,因为那国王是个好色者。显示巴利原文
Upasaṅkamatīti ettha yathā so rājā upasaṅkami, taṃ āgamanato paṭṭhāya dassetuṃ ‘‘thero kirā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Mahāpānaṃ nāma aññaṃ kammaṃ akatvā pānapasuto hutvā sattāhaṃ tadanurūpaparijanassa surāpivanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘mahāpānaṃ nāma pivitvā’’ti. Sālithusehīti rattasālithusehi. Ḍayhamānaṃ viya kipillikadaṃsanajātāhi dukkhavedanāhi. Mukhasattīhi vijjhiṃsu vallabhatāya. Itthilolo hi so rājā.
「传承」(Paveṇi):指他们所受持的传承,即梵行的相续。「令行」(Paṭipādenti):指成就。「重所缘」(Garukārammaṇa):指应受尊重的所缘,亦即不可违越的所缘。「他的」(Assa):指国王的。「心不入」(Cittaṃ anotarantaṃ):指心不进入、不趋入信解的途径。「恼害」(Viheṭhetuṃ):指逼迫。显示巴利原文
Paveṇinti tesaṃ samādānapaveṇiṃ brahmacariyapabandhaṃ. Paṭipādentīti sampādenti. Garukārammaṇanti garukātabbaārammaṇaṃ, avītikkamitabbārammaṇanti attho. Assāti rañño. Cittaṃ anotarantanti pasādavīthiṃ anotarantaṃ anupagacchantaṃ. Viheṭhetunti vibādhituṃ.
由于贪屡屡生起,故以复数形式说为“贪法”。此中亦有“生起”的含义:因为正在生起的贪法,摄持自身的因缘,如同令其被了知一般而俱起转起。「即此身」(Imameva kāyaṃ):此处“身”(kāya)一词义为聚集,因为它所指的是于子宫等处生起之诸法的聚集;而其他情形则是以身体作为标识,故应知为“身”。这是很明确的,因为下文已说了理则。显示巴利原文
Lobhassa aparāparuppattiyā bahuvacanavasena ‘‘lobhadhammā’’ti vuttaṃ. Uppajjantītipi attho yeva, yasmā uppajjamāno lobhadhammo attano hetupaccaye pariggahāpento jānāpento viya sahati pavattatīti. Imameva kāyanti ettha samūhatthe eva kāya-saddo gabbhāsayādiṭṭhānesu uppajjanadhammasamūhavisayattā, itare pana kāyūpalakkhitatāya ‘‘kāyo’’ti veditabbā. Uttānameva heṭṭhā vuttanayattā.
六、《瞿师罗经》的解释显示巴利原文
6. Ghositasuttavaṇṇanā
129 「可意之色」:指青、黄等不同种类的色法,以及为意识所悦意、可爱的色法;这是为了显示乐受触的性质。同样,在「可意之色,为舍受所缘」等处,也应按理类比说明。“眼识……触”是这么说的。因为与眼识相应的触,是从亲依止缘的角度而成为乐受,并非从俱生缘的角度。因此说:“依一个触,由速行之力而生起乐受”。其余诸句,则是在“居士,确有耳界……”等所说的五个部分之中。显示巴利原文
129.Rūpā ca manāpāti nīlādibhedā rūpadhammā ca manasā manuññā piyarūpā saṃvijjanti, idañca sukhavedanīyassa phassassa sabhāvadassanatthaṃ. Evaṃ ‘‘rūpā ca manāpā upekkhāvedaniyā’’ti etthāpi yathārahaṃ vattabbaṃ. Cakkhuviññāṇa…pe… phassanti vuttaṃ. Upanissayakoṭiyā hi cakkhuviññāṇasampayuttaphasso sukhavedanīyo, na sahajātakoṭiyā. Tenāha – ‘‘ekaṃ phassaṃ paṭicca javanavasena sukhavedanā uppajjatī’’ti. Sesapadesūti ‘‘saṃvijjati kho, gahapati, sotadhātū’’ti āgatesu pañcasu koṭṭhāsesu.
依六门分别而解说二十三种界。「依于心所依处」:即依止于心脏所依处。于五门中有二十种,于意门中有三种,如此合为二十三种。显示巴利原文
Tevīsatidhātuyo kathitā channaṃ dvārānaṃ vasena vibhajjagahaṇena. Vatthunissitanti hadayavatthunissitaṃ. Pañcadvāre vīsati, manodvāre tisso evaṃ tevīsati.
7-8. 《诃梨提迦尼经》等的解释显示巴利原文
7-8. Hāliddikānisuttādivaṇṇanā
130-131 「它就是如此」的意思是:由眼所见的色,「它就是如此」即指此而言。所谓「缘乐受者」,是指作为乐受亲依止缘的眼识,以及相应于各种情况——或作为亲依止缘,或作为无间缘,或作为俱生缘与相应缘——而成为乐受之缘的触。缘彼乐受之触而生起乐受,这是句子的连接。此理也适用于其余七个转起。或者,所谓「与意界相同」,这是依阿毗达摩的理趣而说;而依经的理趣,因空无自性、无众生、无命我的意义,它同样被指称为「意界」。第八个转起本身即已清楚,因其道理已于前文解释。显示巴利原文
130-131.Taṃitthetanti cakkhunā yaṃ rūpaṃ diṭṭhaṃ, taṃ itthanti attho. Taṃ sukhavedaniyanti taṃ sukhavedanāya upanissayakoṭiyā paccayabhūtaṃ cakkhuviññāṇañceva, yo ca yathārahaṃ upanissayakoṭiyā vā, anantaro ce anantarakoṭiyā vā, sahajāto ce sampayuttakoṭiyā vā, sukhavedanāya paccayo phasso. Taṃ sukhavedaniyañca phassaṃ paṭicca uppajjati sukhavedanāti yojanā. Esa nayo sabbattha sabbesu sesesu sattasu vāresu. Manodhātuyeva vā samānāti abhidhammanayena. Suttantanayena pana suññataṭṭhena nissattanijjīvaṭṭhena ca manodhātusamaññaṃ labhateva. Aṭṭhamaṃ uttānameva heṭṭhā vuttanayattā.
9. 《露遮经》的解释显示巴利原文
9. Lohiccasuttavaṇṇanā
132 他们也被称为「年轻人」,但并非单指婆罗门族的青年。「Seleyyakāni」(黏附游戏)指的是彼此黏附、逾越界限的那些游戏。显示巴利原文
132.Tepi māṇavakātveva vuttā, na brāhmaṇakumārā eva. Seleyyakānīti aññamaññaṃ silissanalaṅghanakīḷanāni.
因随侍而运送财物,故称“ibbhā”(运财者),即照管大象的象倌。他们由于属于家产微薄者的受用之物,又具有居士身份,因此也称为“居士”。 “Kaṇhā”(黑)指黑生种姓者。“维持国土”(Raṭṭhaṃ bharantī)是指:在所在的国土中,通过向该国土缴纳税赋,或通过维持自己的家产而被称为“维持者”。“Pariyāyantā”(游行者)的意思是,他们四处环行,随处嬉戏。显示巴利原文
Upaṭṭhānavasena ibhaṃ harantīti ibbhā, hatthigopakā. Te pana nihīnakuṭumbassa bhoggaṃ upādāya gahapatibhāvaṃ upādāya ‘‘gahapatikā’’tipi vuccantīti āha ‘‘gahapatikā’’ti. Kaṇhāti kaṇhābhijātikā. Raṭṭhaṃ bharantīti yasmiṃ raṭṭhe vasanti, tassa raṭṭhassa baliṃ bharaṇena, attano vā kuṭumbassa bharaṇena bharatā. Pariyāyantāti parito saṃcarantā kīḷanti.
“Sīlajeṭṭhakā”(以戒为尊)即是以戒为最上者。那些能忆持古法的人,便是过去戒行最殊胜的人。“诸门”指的是眼等感官之门。显示巴利原文
Sīlajeṭṭhakāti sīlappadhānā. Ye purāṇaṃ saranti, te sīluttamā ahesuṃ. Dvārāni cakkhādidvārāni.
“离去后”(Apakkamitvā)即已经离开、脱离或别去。“不平坦的”(Visamāni)指失去了平坦的性状,即具有了恶行的性质。“种种杖罚”(Nānāvidhadaṇḍā)是指种种棍棒的击打。显示巴利原文
Apakkamitvā apetā virahitā hutvā. Visamānīti vigatasamāni duccaritasabhāvāni. Nānāvidhadaṇḍā nānāvidhadaṇḍanipātā.
「不进食者」(Anāhārakā),指完全不享用任何食物的人。「犹如泥沼的泥垢」(Paṅko viya paṅko),即是污秽。「牙齿的泥垢」(Dantapaṅko),因省略了前一词而单说“泥垢”,故谓“泥垢即指齿垢”。「对山羊应做之事,不加害而行之」(Ajehi kātabbakānaṃ akopetvā karaṇaṃ),指通过受持的方式实践的誓愿,此理于后述诸项亦皆适用。所谓「欺诈」(Kohaññaṃ),是指覆藏自身的过失,却宣扬不实之德,因此说那是覆藏……及欺诈。「资具器物之论」(Parikkhārabhaṇḍakavaṇṇā),意指这些资具器物乃赖以活命,而那些人是为了自己的生计,为了以诱饵系缚他人、使人不得解脱而行此事。显示巴利原文
Anāhārakāti kiñci abhuñjanakā. Paṅko viya paṅko, malaṃ. Dantapaṅko purimapadalopena paṅkoti vuttoti ‘‘paṅko nāma dantamala’’nti vuttaṃ. Ajehi kātabbakānaṃ akopetvā karaṇaṃ samādānavasena vataṃ. Esa nayo sesesupi. Kohaññaṃ nāma attani vijjamānadosaṃ paṭicchādetvā asantaguṇapakāsanāti āha – ‘‘paṭicchanna…pe… kohaññañcevā’’ti. Parikkhārabhaṇḍakavaṇṇāti parikkhārabhaṇḍā kappakāti. Te ca kho attano jīvikatthāya āmisakiñjakkhassa attanibandhanatthāya amocanatthāya katā.
「无硬结」(akhila):由修习梵住而彻底去除了心的荒芜,故无硬结。因而注释说“柔和且不僵硬”。显示巴利原文
Akhilanti cetokhilarahitaṃ brahmavihāravasena. Tenāha ‘‘mudu athaddha’’nti.
「已倾向」(Adhimutto):因喜爱而专注投入。「小的心」(parittacitta):从各方面都显得破碎、狭窄的心。「无量的心」(appamāṇacitta):在此能遮止“这是谁”这种分别对待的心。显示巴利原文
Adhimuttoti abhirativasena yuttapayutto. Parittacittoti parito khaṇḍitacitto. Appamāṇacittoti ettha ‘‘ko aya’’nti paṭikkhituṃ sakkuṇeyyacitto.
10.《韦罗哈迦尼经》注释显示巴利原文
10. Verahaccānisuttavaṇṇanā
133 为了催促那位婆罗门女前去听法,年轻人说道“yagghe”。因此注释说:“yagghe 是一个表示催促义的词。”显示巴利原文
133. Brāhmaṇiṃ dhammasavanāya codento māṇavako ‘‘yagghe’’ti avoca. Tenāha ‘‘yaggheti codanatthe nipāto’’ti.
天臂品显示巴利原文
14. Devadahavaggo
1. 《天臂经》注释显示巴利原文
1. Devadahasuttavaṇṇanā
134 “使意欢悦者”:指现于意门时,以能让心意欢悦、令人生起喜爱的方式而转起的。显示巴利原文
134.Manaṃ ramayantāti āpāthagatā manassa ramaṇavasena piyāyitabbatāvasena pavattantā.
《刹那经》注释显示巴利原文
2. Khaṇasuttavaṇṇanā
135 「六触处」:即由六触处所感受的不可意境。「六门触了别」:凡通过六门所得种种所缘的了别,其目的无不是为了领受痛苦。「三十三天城」:即善见大城。所谓「无有」之处并不存在,因一切时皆可领受快乐。言「地狱」,即因恶趣存在的共性,其余恶道亦被包含其中。无法安住于「道梵行住」:由此可知,此处亦包含一切中断修行的处境。「唯此」:即仅于此人界。恶趣亦显现,因有时能感受到类似恶趣之苦;天界亦显现,因有时能获得类似天界享乐之成就。显示巴利原文
135.Chaphassāyatanikāti chahi phassāyatanehi aniṭṭhasaṃvedaniyā. Chadvāraphassapaṭiviññattīti chahipi dvārehi ārammaṇassa paṭisaṃvedanā hotiyeva sabbaso dukkhānubhavanatthaṃ. Tāvatiṃsapuranti sudassanamahānagaraṃ. Abhāvo nāma natthi sabbathā sukhānubhavanato. Nirayeti iminā duggati bhavasāmaññena itarāpāyāpi gahitā eva. Maggabrahmacariyavāsaṃ vasituṃ na sakkāti iminā pana sabbesampi acchindikaṭṭhānānaṃ gahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Imevāti imasmiṃ manussaloke eva. Apāyopi paññāyati apāyadukkhasadisassa dukkhassa kadāci paṭisaṃvedanato. Saggopi paññāyati devabhogasadisasampattiyā kadāci paṭilabhitabbato.
「此是业地」:此人间界被称为「业地」,因为这是适合众生展现人力、造作诸业之处。为了显示此地的精勤之业,故说「在此修习道」。「处」:即原因。「悚惧事」:指能引发悚惧的众多事物,如生等。的确,生、老、病、死,堕入恶趣,其中导致地狱再生之因、导致畜生再生之因、导致阿修罗身再生之因,过去轮回之根、未来轮回之根,以及现在觅食之根——如此观察众多悚惧事之后,已生悚惧、已起悚惧者,你们应当如理地精进努力。「悚惧」:即令悚惧生起。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ kammabhūmīti ayaṃ manussaloko purisathāmakaraṇāya kammabhūmi nāma tāsaṃ yogyaṭṭhānabhāvato. Tattha padhānakammaṃ dassento ‘‘idha maggabhāvanā’’ti āha. Ṭhānānīti kāraṇāni. Saṃvejaniyānīti saṃvegajananāni bahūni jātiādīni. Tathā hi jāti, jarā, byādhi, maraṇaṃ, apāyabhavaṃ, tatthapi nirayūpapattihetukaṃ, tiracchānupapattihetukaṃ, asūrakāyūpapattihetukaṃ, atīte vaṭṭamūlakaṃ, anāgate vaṭṭamūlakaṃ, paccuppanne āhārapariyeṭṭhimūlakanti bahūni saṃvegavatthūni paccavekkhitvā saṃvegajāto sañjātasaṃvego yoniso padhānamanuyuñjassu. Saṃvegāti saṃvegamāpajjassu.
《第一色喜经》注释显示巴利原文
3. Paṭhamarūpārāmasuttavaṇṇanā
136 「善喜者」指达到欢喜的人;「欣悦者」指已生起欣悦的人。「苦」指有苦、已生苦之人,故称「痛苦者」。「乐」指此中有乐,故为乐者、有乐者,因此说「安乐者」。凡世间存在的色等诸法,即被称作「世间」。「观见者」指透过证得真实而正确观见的人。在说明「是相反的」之后,为了显示这种相反性,便接着说「世间……」等内容。「不净」应与「称为」一词相连来理解。「这全部」即前面所说“乐为圣者所见……乃至……彼圣者知为乐”等,这一切皆是针对涅槃而说。因为唯有涅槃方为绝对之乐。显示巴利原文
136.Sammuditā sammodappattā, pamoditā sañjātapamodā. Dukkhāti dukkhavanto sañjātadukkhā. Tenāha ‘‘dukkhitā’’ti. Sukhaṃ etassa atthīti sukho, sukhī. Tenāha ‘‘sukhito’’ti. Yattakā rūpādayo dhammā loke atthīti vuccati. Passantānanti saccapaṭivedhena sammadeva passantānaṃ. ‘‘Paccanīkaṃ hotī’’ti vatvā taṃ paccanīkabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘loko hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Asubhāti ‘‘āhū’’tipadaṃ ānetvā sambandho. Sabbametanti ‘‘sukhaṃ diṭṭhamariyebhi…pe… tadariyā sukhato vidū’’ti ca vuttaṃ. Sabbametaṃ nibbānameva sandhāya vuttaṃ. Nibbānameva hi ekantato sukhaṃ nāma.
九十五种外道及其外道性,在《破迷论注释》中已有说明。「被烦恼盖所覆」:是指被烦恼蕴——即烦恼盖——所障碍的人。「涅槃见」即是圣道;依此圣道证悟涅槃,犹如被乌云覆盖的月轮。显示巴利原文
Pañcanavutipāsaṇḍino tesañca pāsaṇḍibhāvo papañcasūdaniṭṭhakathāyaṃ pakāsito eva. Kilesanīvaraṇena nivutānanti kilesakhandhā kilesanīvaraṇaṃ, tena nivāritānaṃ. Nibbānadassanaṃ nāma ariyamaggo, tena tassa paṭivijjhanañca kāḷameghaavacchāditaṃ viya candamaṇḍalaṃ.
「限定后」:即由不净性的限定与正智正见的限定而限定之后。「道法」:指圣道法。显示巴利原文
Paricchinditvāti asubhabhāvaparicchindanena sammāviññāṇadassanena ca paricchinditvā. Maggadhammassāti ariyamaggadhammassa.
「未生起者」:指那些紧随不舍地行道的人。此句意谓:谁能了知?他人则不能了知。显示巴利原文
Anupannehīti anu anu avihāya paṭipannehi. Ko nu añño jānituṃ arahati, añño na jānātīti dasseti.
《第二色喜等经》注释显示巴利原文
4-12. Dutiyarūpārāmasuttādivaṇṇanā
137-145 纯以长行方式,而非偈颂结合。「以各种方式」:是将内处与外处,配合无常相、苦相、无我相而显示之义。显示巴利原文
137-145.Suddhikaṃ katvā gāthābandhanena vinā kevalaṃ cuṇṇiyapadavaseneva. Tathā tathāti ajjhattikāni bāhirāni ca āyatanāni aniccalakkhaṇena dukkhānattalakkhaṇehi ca yojetvā dassanavasena.
第十五 新旧品显示巴利原文
15. Navapurāṇavaggo
第一 业灭经注释显示巴利原文
1. Kammanirodhasuttavaṇṇanā
146 此处是就当前现存的眼以及引生该眼的业而说,故说「眼不是旧的,只有业是旧的」。为说明眼在何种意义上可称为「旧」,又说「然而从业的角度」等。「以缘的名称」:此业于前生已然成就,作为缘的业当名为「旧」,即是以缘业之名而称说,故有「旧业」之说。「诸缘所造」:指由渴爱、无明等诸缘共同聚集、和合而产生。「以思」:指业的思心所。「思所造」:指由思所策励而造作。「以受」:是依托自身、以此为所缘而生起的受。「处」:即生起之因、住立之处,应以观慧照见。「业灭」:是通过烦恼不再生起的灭尽而成就的业的灭尽。「触证解脱」:即证得阿拉汉果的解脱。作为所缘灭的涅槃被称为「业灭」,意为业于此息灭。因佛陀曾说「诸比丘,应当修习禅那,莫放逸」,故说「前行之观已宣说」。显示巴利原文
146. Sampati vijjamānassa cakkhussa taṃnibbattassa kammassa ca adhippetattā ‘‘na cakkhu purāṇaṃ, kammameva purāṇa’’nti vatvā yathā tassa cakkhussa purāṇapariyāyo vutto, taṃ dassento āha – ‘‘kammato panā’’tiādi. Paccayanāmenāti purimajātisaṃsiddhattā ‘‘purāṇa’’nti vattabbassa paccayabhūtassa kammassa nāmena. Evaṃ vuttanti ‘‘purāṇakamma’’nti evaṃ vuttaṃ. Paccayehi abhisamāgantvā katanti taṇhāvijjādipaccayehi abhimukhabhāvena samāgantvā samecca nibbattitaṃ. Cetanāyāti kammacetanāya. Pakappitanti abhisamīhitaṃ. Vedanāyāti attānaṃ nissāya ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavattāya vedanāya. Vatthūti nibbattikāraṇaṃ pavattaṭṭhānanti vipassanāpaññāya passitabbaṃ. Kammassa nirodhenāti kilesānaṃ anuppādanirodhasiddhena kammassa nirodhena. Vimuttiṃ phusatīti arahattaphalavimuttiṃ pāpuṇāti. Ārammaṇabhūto nirodho nibbānaṃ ‘‘kammanirodho’’ti vuccati, ‘‘kammaṃ nirujjhati etthā’’ti katvā. ‘‘Jhāyatha, bhikkhave, mā pamādatthā’’ti vuttattā ‘‘pubbabhāgavipassanā kathitā’’ti vuttaṃ.
第二至第五 无常涅槃适合等经的注释显示巴利原文
2-5. Aniccanibbānasappāyasuttādivaṇṇanā
147-150 “涅槃的”:指为了证得涅槃,或指烦恼的涅槃。“有帮助的修行”:指能带来利益的修行。“在四者中”:指在第二等四者之中。因为说明了适合涅槃的修行,所以说“连同观,四道已被宣说”。显示巴利原文
147-150.Nibbānassāti nibbānādhigamassa, kilesanibbānasseva vā. Upakārapaṭipadanti upakārāvahaṃ paṭipadaṃ. Catūsūti dutiyādīsu catūsu. Nibbānasappāyā paṭipadā desitāti katvā ‘‘saha vipassanāya cattāro maggā kathitā’’ti vuttaṃ.
《学童经》等的注释显示巴利原文
6-7. Antevāsikasuttādivaṇṇanā
151-152 「边」这个词在“水边”“林边”等用法中,表示“附近”的意思。而烦恼因为住在极为靠近内心的内部,所以被称为「学童」,就像“林中善巧者”“岸树”那样,是通过省略格变化来构造的。因此他说:「无学童者」就是指已经远离了内部安住的烦恼的人。「远离现行烦恼者」意思是远离了浮现出来的烦恼。「彼内住者」是指安住在这个补特伽罗的内心中,在那里生起。「那些压制此者」指那些烦恼征服了这个补特伽罗之后,让他随自己的支配而运作。因此他说:「也就是压倒,或是教诫。」「那些老师」是指那些被称为烦恼的老师,它们让有情众生安住于自己的趣向之中。第七个是下面已经说过的方法,因为下面是以蕴的方式来开示,而这里是以处的方式来开示,这是唯一的不同。显示巴利原文
151-152. Anta-saddo samīpatthe vattati ‘‘udakantaṃ vananta’’ntiādīsu, kileso pana atiāsanne vasati abbhantaravuttitāyāti ‘‘antevāsika’’nti vutto vibhattialopena yathā ‘‘vanekusalo, kūlerukkhā’’ti. Tenāha – ‘‘anantevāsikanti antovasanakilesavirahita’’nti. Ācaraṇakakilesavirahitanti samudācaraṇakilesarahitaṃ. Antoassa vasantīti assa puggalassa anto abbhantare citte vasanti pavattanti. Te etaṃ adhibhavantīti te kilesā etaṃ puggalaṃ abhibhavitvā attano vase vattenti. Tenāha – ‘‘ajjhottharanti sikkhāpenti vā’’ti. Tehi ācariyehīti tehi kilesasaṅkhātehi satte attano gatiyaṃ ṭhapentehi ācariyehi. Sattamaṃ heṭṭhā kathitanayamevāti yasmā heṭṭhā khandhavasena desanā āgatā, idha āyatanavasenāti ayameva viseso.
《是否存在理趣经》注释显示巴利原文
8. Atthinukhopariyāyasuttavaṇṇanā
153 “Pariyāyati”是遍行、得到其果,因此“pariyāya”是因,所以他说:“所谓‘pariyāya’,就是原因。”对于现量所见、无颠倒的意义而生起的信,是现量信,例如“世尊是正自觉者,法是善说”等。像这样,依靠“据说如此”而生起的信,那只是相似的信。“此”指“只除了信之外”这句话。“令喜欢”:以己心喜爱某义。“令堪忍”是其同义词,即让心如此接受。因此他说:“这就是执取之相。”对于以传承而得的意义,“据说如此”就是传闻。“对于正在思维原因的人”:指正在思维合理性的人。“原因现前”:指因对于自心显现为“善哉”的样态。“执取此义”:心执取“此因、此义如此合理”的想。“理审察”:指合理的构想。“执见”:指确定地执取,而这本身就是见,但由于是不如实的执取,故知唯是无明。“此”指执见。“求此义者”:指此执见于我中生起、存在,以与理相应、合理的方式可得。像这样执取的样态,就称为“观见忍”;对于最初生起的执见——也就是所谓的见——显示巴利原文
153. Pariyāyati parigacchati phalaṃ etassāti pariyāyo hetūti āha – ‘‘yaṃ pariyāyanti yaṃ kāraṇa’’nti. Paccakkhadiṭṭhe aviparīte atthe pavattasaddhā paccakkhasaddhā yathā ‘‘sammāsambuddho bhagavā, svākhāto dhammo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.288) ca. Evaṃ kirāti iti kirāya uppanno saddahanākāro saddhāpatirūpako. Etanti ‘‘aññatreva saddhāyā’’ti etaṃ vacanaṃ . Rucāpetvāti kiñci atthaṃ attano matiyā rocetvā. Khamāpetvāti tasseva vevacanaṃ, cittaṃ tathā khamāpetvā. Tenāha – ‘‘atthetanti gahaṇākāro’’ti. Paramparāgatassa atthassa evaṃ kirassāti anussavanaṃ. Kāraṇaṃ cintentassāti yuttiṃ cintentassa. Kāraṇaṃ upaṭṭhātīti ‘‘sādhū’’ti attano cittassa upatiṭṭhati. Atthetanti ‘‘etaṃ kāraṇaṃ evamayamattho yujjatī’’ti cittena gahaṇaṃ. Ākāraparivitakkoti yuttiparikappanā. Laddhīti nicchayena gahaṇaṃ, sā ca kho diṭṭhi ayāthāvaggahaṇena aññāṇamevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tanti laddhiṃ. Atthesāti esā laddhi mama uppannā atthi yuttarūpā hutvā upalabbhati. Evaṃ gahaṇākāro diṭṭhinijjhānakkhanti nāma, paṭhamuppannaladdhisaṅkhātāya diṭṭhiyā nijjhānaṃ khamanākāro diṭṭhinijjhānakkhanti nāma. Pañca ṭhānānīti yathāvuttāni saddhādīni pañca kāraṇāni. Muñcitvā aggahetvā. Heṭṭhimamaggavajjhānaṃ rāgādīnaṃ abhāvaṃ sandhāya ‘‘natthi me ajjhattaṃ rāgadosamoho’’ti ayaṃ sekkhānaṃ paccavekkhaṇā, sabbaso abhāvaṃ sandhāya asekkhānanti āha – ‘‘sekkhāsekkhānaṃ paccavekkhaṇā kathitā’’ti. ‘‘Santaṃ vā ajjhatta’’ntiādinā sekkhānaṃ, ‘‘asantaṃ vā ajjhatta’’ntiādinā asekkhānaṃ paccavekkhaṇā kathitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
《根成就经》等的注释显示巴利原文
9-10. Indriyasampannasuttādivaṇṇanā
154-155 正如“比丘们,你们当具足戒而安住”等经文中那样,这里的“sampanna”一词意为“圆满”,故说“根圆满”。因诸根具足,名为“根圆满”,这是其中的关联。若仅如此,便等同于说“具足成就”,为免此疑,于是又说“或指眼等诸根”。“关于这个”,是指后一种解释所说明的意义。前面在“蕴品”中是以蕴的方式开示的,而这里是以依处的方式开示,因此说“即前述方法而已”。显示巴利原文
154-155. ‘‘Sampannasīlā, bhikkhave, viharathā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.64) viya paripuṇṇattho idha sampanna-saddoti āha ‘‘paripuṇṇindriyo’’ti. Indriyehi samannāgatattā paripuṇṇindriyo nāma hotīti sambandho. Evaṃ sati samannāgamasampatti vuttā hotīti āsaṅkanto ‘‘cakkhādīni vā’’tiādimāha. Taṃ sandhāyāti dutiyavikappena vuttamatthaṃ sandhāya. Heṭṭhā khandhiyavagge khandhavasena desanā āgatā, idha āyatanavasenāti āha ‘‘vuttanayamevā’’ti.
16. 喜灭尽品显示巴利原文
16. Nandikkhayavaggo
1-4. 内喜尽经等注释显示巴利原文
1-4. Ajjhattanandikkhayasuttādivaṇṇanā
156-159 “义”:从自性上说。凭依智慧、作为圣者所应知的义,就是自性。如此,具别异自性者,以喜悦义称为“喜”,以染着义称为“贪”。“以解脱力”:指藉由证得解脱之力。“在此”:指于这第一经中。“在第二等中”:指于第二、第三、第四诸经中。这些意义显明,因前已述其方法故。显示巴利原文
156-159.Atthatoti sabhāvato. Ñāṇena ariyato ñātabbato attho, sabhāvoti. Evañhi abhijjanasabhāvo nandanaṭṭhena nandī, rañjanaṭṭhena rāgo. Vimuttivasenāti vimuttiyā adhigamavasena. Etthāti imasmiṃ paṭhamasutte. Dutiyādīsūti dutiyatatiyacatutthesu. Uttānameva heṭṭhā vuttanayattā.
5-6.《耆婆芒果园定经》等的注释显示巴利原文
5-6. Jīvakambavanasamādhisuttādivaṇṇanā
160-161 这是说明:定不足者正在获得心一境性;隐居不足者正在获得身远离与心一境性。“明显”意为显著地现前。“沉下”即指现观,由于四圣谛法以显著的方式现前而作此说,故说“在两者……中被说”等。显示巴利原文
160-161. Samādhivikalānaṃ cittekaggataṃ labhantānaṃ, paṭisallānavikalānaṃ kāyavivekañca cittekaggatañca labhantānanti yojanā. Pākaṭaṃ hotīti vibhūtaṃ hutvā upaṭṭhāti. Okkhāyati paccakkhāyatīti catusaccadhammānaṃ vibhūtabhāvena upaṭṭhānassa kathitattā vuttaṃ – ‘‘dvīsupi…pe… kathitā’’ti.
7-9.《果提咖无常经》等的注释显示巴利原文
7-9. Koṭṭhikaaniccasuttādivaṇṇanā
162-164 无常随观等本身即是所谓的“令解脱成熟”之法。那时,那位长老的信等诸根尚未成熟,他透过这些开示而令诸根达到成熟。显示巴利原文
162-164. Aniccānupassanādayo eva vimuttiparipācaniyā dhammā nāma. Therassa tadā saddhādīni indriyāni na paripākaṃ upagatāni, thero imāhi desanāhi indriyaparipākamagamāsi.
10-12.《断除邪见经》等的注释显示巴利原文
10-12. Micchādiṭṭhipahānasuttādivaṇṇanā
165-167 “各别”即一个个、分别的意思。“依已说之理”,是依照前文所说之理,因为没有新的内容需要说明。显示巴利原文
165-167.Pāṭiyekkanti visuṃ visuṃ. Vuttanayenevāti heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva apubbassa vattabbassa abhāvā.
十七 六十重颂品显示巴利原文
17. Saṭṭhipeyyālavaggo
1-60.《内无常欲经》等的注释显示巴利原文
1-60. Ajjhattaaniccachandasuttādivaṇṇanā
168-227 168-227. 以“诸比丘,凡是无常者,你们应断欲”等为开端,随顺各各补特伽罗的意乐,宣说了六十经。这些经又以重颂的形式汇入开示,故称“名为六十重颂”。由此而有“然此中诸……”等说。显示巴利原文
168-227. ‘‘Yaṃ, bhikkhave, aniccaṃ, tatra vo chando pahātabbo’’tiādinā tesaṃ tesaṃ puggalānaṃ ajjhāsayavasena saṭṭhi suttāni kathitāni , tāni ca peyyālanayena desanaṃ āruḷhānīti ‘‘saṭṭhipeyyālo nāma hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘yāni panetthā’’tiādi.
十八 大海品显示巴利原文
18. Samuddavaggo
第一 第一大海经注释显示巴利原文
1. Paṭhamasamuddasuttavaṇṇanā
228 228. 若依“难以充满”与“汇合”这双重含义而称海洋为“海”,那么,为了表明此二者无有例外地只适用于眼,才说“yadi”等。其中,“难以充满”是指无法填满的状态。“汇合”是指完全不断地汇入。因为,即使恒河等大河的巨大水流年复一年地不断涌入,大海也不会因此填满;而海水所淹没之处,未必就变成海洋之相,一旦海水退去,那地方便不复存在,或回归无水状态,一如往昔(并非海洋)。虽然这种难以充满与汇合之义在海洋中也能见到,但为了指出此二者更特别地存在于眼,所以说“tassa hi”等。“samosarantanti”(汇入)是指完全随青等颜色部分而汇入,即进入视野的范围。由于难以填满,所以无法满足。“伴随贪染而行”(sadosagamanena)是因为它染污了众生的相续。其染污性应当理解为依眼门渴爱而了知。正如海中一波接一波翻腾的波浪之速行被称为“大海的”;同样,在此眼前之眼海中,青等不同种类的色所缘如波浪般一波接一波地翻腾,由显示巴利原文
228. Yadi ‘‘duppūraṇaṭṭhena samuddanaṭṭhenā’’ti iminā atthadvayena sāgaro ‘‘samuddo’’ti vuccati, cakkhussevetaṃ nippariyāyato yujjatīti dassetuṃ ‘‘yadī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha duppūraṇaṭṭhenāti pūretuṃ asakkuṇeyyabhāvena. Samuddanaṭṭhenāti sabbaso uparūparipakkhittagamanena. Mahāgaṅgādimahānadīnaṃ mahatā udakoghena anusaṃvaccharaṃ anupakkhandamānopi hi samuddo pāripūriṃ na gacchati, yañca bhūmipadesaṃ ottharati, taṃ samuddabhāvaṃ neti, abhāvaṃ vā pāpuṇāti apayāte samuddodake, taṃ vā anudakabhāvapattiyā atathameva hoti. Kāmañcesa duppūraṇaṭṭho samuddanaṭṭho sāgare labbhati, tathāpi taṃ dvayaṃ cakkhusmiṃyeva visesato labbhatīti dassento ‘‘tassa hī’’tiādimāha. Samosarantanti sabbaso nīlādibhāgehi osarantaṃ, āpāthaṃ āgacchantanti attho. Kātuṃ na sakkoti duppūraṇīyattā. Sadosagamanena gacchati sattasantānassa dussanato. Dussanaṭṭhatā cassa cakkhudvārikataṇhāvasena veditabbā. Yathā samudde aparāparaṃ parivattamāno ūmiyā vego samuddassāti vuccati, evaṃ cakkhusamuddassa purato aparāparaṃ parivattamānaṃ nīlādibhedaṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ cakkhussāti vattabbataṃ arahati anaññasādhāraṇattāti vuttaṃ ‘‘rūpamayo vego’’ti. Asamapekkhiteti sammādassane rūpe manāpabhāvaṃ amanāpabhāvañca gahetvā, ‘‘idaṃ nāma mayā diṭṭha’’nti anupadhārentassa kevalaṃ samūhaghanavasena gaṇhantassa gahaṇaṃ asamapekkhanaṃ. Sahatīti adhibhavati, taṃnimittaṃ kañci vikāraṃ nāpajjati.
“Ūmī”(波浪)即水波。“Āvaṭṭo”(漩涡)是因旋转而流动的水。“Gāharakkhasamakarādayo”(擒人罗刹等)指抓人的罗刹。如同海中波浪层层翻涌,吞没落水之人,使之遭遇不幸与灾难一样,漩涡与擒人罗刹也是如此。同样,这些贪等烦恼,吞没那些烦恼在自身生起的众生,使之遭遇不幸与灾难。由于烦恼的生起是众生遭遇不幸与灾难——即波浪之怖畏——的所缘,所以眼海被说成是“有波浪的、有漩涡的、有擒人罗刹的(saūmisāvaṭṭo sagāho sarakkhaso)”。显示巴利原文
Ūmīti vīciyo. Āvaṭṭo āvaṭṭanavasena pavattaṃ udakaṃ. Gāharakkhasamakarādayo gāharakkhaso. Yathā samudde ūmiyo uparūpari vattamānā attani patitapuggalaṃ ajjhottharitvā anayabyasanaṃ āpādenti, tathā āvaṭṭagāharakkhasā. Evamete rāgādayo kilesā sayaṃ uppannakasatte ajjhottharitvā anayabyasanaṃ āpādenti, kilesuppattinimittatāya sattānaṃ anayabyasanāpattihetubhūtassa ūmibhayassa ārammaṇavasena cakkhusamuddo ‘‘saūmisāvaṭṭo sagāho sarakkhaso’’ti vutto.
“波浪之怖畏(Ūmibhaya)”:在此,因对此生畏,故为怖畏(bhaya),似波浪般的怖畏即波浪之怖畏。愤怒(kodha)以激动为义。而此(忧恼),以压迫内心使之生起、极度疲困为义,故称忧恼(upāyāsa)。于此,愤怒与忧恼反复生起,淹没众生,令其无法抬头,造成不幸与灾难,应观其与波浪的相似。同样,欲乐对于已被烦恼制服的众生,犹如称为“我”一般,令其在所谓的色等所缘中流转轮回,使出离(nekkhamma)等外向心念全然不生,如此卷入漩涡,招致不幸。因此,应观其与漩涡的相似。再者,犹如擒人罗刹制服并捉住一个未加守护、进入其行境之人,即使此人立于行境之外,罗刹亦会将其带入自己行境,通过显现恐怖形象等方式,使之无力自救,进而依附侵入,剥夺其容貌、力量、财富、寿命与快乐,造成巨大的不幸与灾难。同样,女人亦复如是,她征服并捉住一个缺乏如理作意、非英雄的男子,以自己的色相等去显示巴利原文
Ūmibhayanti ettha bhāyati etasmāti bhayaṃ, ūmīva bhayaṃ ūmibhayaṃ. Kujjhanaṭṭhena kodho. Sveva cittassa ca abhimaddanavasenuppādanatthena daḷhaṃ āyāsanaṭṭhena upāyāso. Ettha ca anekavāraṃ pavattitvā satte ajjhottharitvā sīsaṃ ukkhipituṃ adatvā anayabyasananipphādanena kodhūpāyāsassa ūmisadisatā daṭṭhabbā. Tathā kāmaguṇā kilesābhibhūte satte māne viya rūpādivisayasaṅkhāte attani saṃsāretvā yathā tato bahibhūte nekkhamme cittampi na uppajjati, evaṃ āvaṭṭetvā byasanāpādanena āvaṭṭasadisatā daṭṭhabbā. Yadā pana gāharakkhaso ārakkharahitaṃ attano gocarabhūmigataṃ purisaṃ abhibhuyya gahetvā agocare ṭhitampi gocaraṃ netvā bheravarūpadassanādinā attano upakkamaṃ kātuṃ asamatthaṃ katvā anvāvisitvā vaṇṇabalabhogaāyusukhehi viyojetvā mahantaṃ anayabyasanaṃ āpādeti, evaṃ mātugāmopi yonisomanasikārarahitaṃ avīrapurisaṃ attano rūpādīhi palobhanavasena abhibhuyya gahetvā vā vīrajātiyampi itthikuttabhūtehi attano hāvabhāvavilāsehi itthimāyāya anvāvisitvā vā avasaṃ attano upakāradhamme sīlādayo sampādetuṃ asamatthaṃ karonto guṇavaṇṇādīhi viyojetvā mahantaṃ anayabyasanaṃ āpādeti, evaṃ mātugāmassa gāharakkhasasadisatā daṭṭhabbā. Ūmibhayanti lakkhaṇavacanaṃ . Yathā hi ūmi bhāyitabbaṭṭhena bhayaṃ, evaṃ āvaṭṭagāharakkhasāpīti ūmiādibhayena sabhayanti attho veditabbo. Antaṃ avasānaṃ gato, evaṃ pāraṃ nibbānaṃ gatoti vuccati.
第二-第三 大海经等注释显示巴利原文
2-3. Dutiyasamuddasuttādivaṇṇanā
229-230 他指出烦恼的润湿与带入,故说「以湿润之义」。这里的圣弟子,指不来者;因为他们于欲有方面已超越,故不被润湿。三种死亡,即烦恼魔、行魔与天子魔。所谓三种依,即是依烦恼、行与欲乐三种。然而,由于以蕴为依,他并非无依者,彼唯证有余涅槃故。「已到达」是指以行道到达。显示巴利原文
229-230. Kilesānaṃ allabhāvūpanayananti āha ‘‘temanaṭṭhenā’’ti. Ariyasāvaketi anāgāmino. Te hi kāmabhavavasena atintatāya na samunnā. Tayo maccūti kilesābhisaṅkhāradevaputtamāre. Tīhi upadhīhīti kilesābhisaṅkhārakāmaguṇānaṃ vasena tīhi upadhīhi. Khandhupadhinā pana so na nirūpadhi saupādisesasseva nibbānassa adhigatattā. Gatoti paṭipattigamanena gato.
4-6. 乳树譬喻经等注释显示巴利原文
4-6. Khīrarukkhopamasuttādivaṇṇanā
231-233 「未断除」,指未被圣道所根除的状态。「存在」,即是有。当因缘具足时,由能行存在作用故,现起的烦恼纵使微小,也如鼠毒一般,因其力弱,故称为「小」。「如此之类」也是指少量的。「彼」指烦恼未断除者。所说「极广大」,是面对可爱、可欲之境时,即使所依的可爱所缘极其微小,也会变得极强烈,因此他说「哪怕只有指甲盖那么大……」等。「年轻」等,是三个词。「可击破」,指能打破。「彼两者」即眼与色,也就是这二处。显示巴利原文
231-233.Appahīnaṭṭhenāti maggena asamugghāṭitabhāvena. Atthīti vijjati. Sati paccaye vijjamānakiccakaraṇato pariyuṭṭhānaṃ appakaṃ mūsikāvisaṃ viya parittaṃ nāma hoti appānubhāvattā. Evarūpāpīti appakāpi. Assāti appahīnakilesassa. Adhimattānanti iṭṭhānaṃ rajanīyānaṃ, vatthuvasena parittakampi iṭṭhārammaṇaṃ adhimattameva. Tenāha ‘‘nakhapiṭṭhippamāṇampī’’tiādi. Daharotiādīni tīṇipi padāni. Ābhindeyyāti bhindeyya. Taṃ ubhayanti taṃ cakkhurūpanti ubhayampi āyatanaṃ.
7. 优陀夷经的注疏显示巴利原文
7. Udāyīsuttavaṇṇanā
234 「也是如此」是依此原因而说。藉由「无常」这一特性,阐明了无我的特征。因为识依因缘而生,既有生起,则必有灭;以其有生灭的特性,故识是无常的。若它真是「我」,则应无需因缘而能自成立,然不能如此成就。因此,「识是无我」便是藉由无常性来阐明无我性的。显示巴利原文
234.Itipīti imināpi kāraṇena. Aniccenāti aniccabhāvena anattalakkhaṇaṃ kathitaṃ. Yasmā hetupaccayā viññāṇassa uppatti sati ca uppāde nirodhena bhavitabbaṃ, uppādavayavantatāya aniccaṃ viññāṇaṃ, yadi ca attā siyā paccayehi vinā sijjheyya, na ca tathāssa siddhi, tasmā ‘‘viññāṇaṃ anattā’’ti aniccatāya anattatā kathitā.
8. 燃烧法门经的注疏显示巴利原文
8. Ādittapariyāyasuttavaṇṇanā
235 「随形好」:因烦恼追随并依一一细相而显现,成为其生起的条件。即指手、脚等身体部分,如说“手美好”等。「取相之执」:指执取令烦恼生起之相的方式。「合取」:将各个部分组合在一起后,以“这是女人”“这是男人”等整体地执取。「别取」:指分别地、无遗漏地执取。「如鳄鱼之取」:是如同鳄鱼吞食般的执取方式,故说“它能总取”。至于对手、脚等依各部分区分后执取,犹如红色布条一样的方式,则类似水蛭吸血般地执取。“乃至在一次速行心中亦可得”:此针对随眼门而生起的意门速行心路而言。显示巴利原文
235. Kilesānaṃ anu anu byañjanato paribyattiyā uppattipaccayabhāvato anubyañjanaṃ, hatthapādādiavayavāti āha – ‘‘hatthā sobhanā’’tiādi. Nimittaggāhoti kilesuppattiyā nimittabhūto gāho. Saṃsandetvā gahaṇanti avayave samodhānetvā ‘‘itthipuriso’’tiādinā ekajjhaṃ gahaṇaṃ. Vibhattigahaṇanti vibhāgena anavasesaggahaṇaṃ. Kumbhīlasadisoti kumbhīlagāhasadiso. Tenāha – ‘‘sabbameva gaṇhātī’’ti hatthapādādīsu taṃ taṃ koṭṭhāsaṃ vibhajitvā gahaṇaṃ rattapāsadiso jalūkagāhasadiso. Ekajavanavārepi labbhantīti idaṃ cakkhudvārānusārena uppannamanodvārikajavanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.
「以味著相而系缚」:即于前述之相,以乐味执取而系缚。「唯由有分」:即根本有分心。「显示烦恼之怖畏」:此为令知应对烦恼生起怖畏;因烦恼如是生起时,若死亡心为不善心所间隔,则必定投生地狱或畜生道。而后,从“时”的角度加以说明:“即在眼门中”等。「染著心」:指因贪欲而染污之心。若问:瞋恚心如何领受所缘之味?应知即忧受之生起为其领受所缘之味。此处的“时”指死亡时。显示巴利原文
Nimittassādena ganthitanti yathāvutte nimitte assādagāhena ganthitaṃ sambaddhaṃ. Bhavaṅgenevāti mūlabhavaṅgeneva. Kilesabhayaṃ dassentoti tathā kilesuppattiyā sati akusalacittena antaritaṃ ce maraṇacittaṃ bhaveyya, ekantato niraye vā tiracchānayoniyā vā uppatti siyāti kilesānaṃ bhāyitabbaṃ dassento. ‘‘Samayavasena vā evaṃ vutta’’nti vatvā tamatthaṃ vivaranto ‘‘cakkhudvārasmiñhī’’tiādimāha. Rattacittaṃ vāti rāgavasena rattacittaṃ vā. Duṭṭhacittena kathaṃ ārammaṇarasānubhavananti? Domanassavedanuppatti eva tassa ārammaṇarasānubhavanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Imassa samayassāti maraṇasamayassa.
「两鼻孔间之骨刺」:谓以剃刀刃般的作用将其割断。「持杖住者」:即持长杖而住者。「躺卧入睡」:此为遮止半睡半醒的惛沉睡眠;因于此半睡状态中,邪寻思之箭或有时机可得,若躺卧进入深度睡眠,则绝无可能。「寻」:指邪寻思。显示巴利原文
Ubhinnaṃ nāsacchiddānaṃ majjhe ṭhita-aṭṭhitudanaṃ saha khuraṭṭhena chindanaṃ. Daṇḍakavāsīti dīghadaṇḍakā mahāvāsi. Nipajjitvā niddokkamananti iminā pacalāyikaniddaṃ paṭikkhipati. Tattha hi kadāci antarā micchāvitakkānaṃ sallakānaṃ avasaro siyā, nattheva nipajjitvā mahāniddaṃ okkantakāle. Vitakkānanti micchāvitakkānaṃ.
第九、十·第一手足比喻经等注疏显示巴利原文
9-10. Paṭhamahatthapādopamasuttādivaṇṇanā
236-237 在第九经中,当提到“显现”时,这是随顺觉悟者的意乐而说的,因此他解释说:“在第十经中,当说到‘不存在’时”等等。实际上,这两部经的不同之处仅此而已。显示巴利原文
236-237. Navamaṃ ‘‘paññāyatī’’ti vuccamāne bujjhanakānaṃ ajjhāsayavasena vuttanti āha – ‘‘dasame na hotīti vuccamāne’’tiādi. Ettakameva hi dvinnaṃ suttānaṃ visesoti.
19. 毒蛇品显示巴利原文
19. Āsīvisavaggo
1. 《毒蛇譬喻经》的注释显示巴利原文
1. Āsīvisopamasuttavaṇṇanā
238 当时围坐在世尊身旁的那些比丘,有些是独住者,有些两人共住,有些三人共住,有些四人共住,有些五人共住,安居在各处的森林静修处。因此说到“独行者……乃至……五众行者”。这是指他们意乐相同、行持同类,都是精勤修习业处的人。正因如此,他们才全心专注、投入其中。这是从诸人的意乐为因而说的。“作为缘”,是指成为所依。从“诸比丘,譬如”开始,一直到“已渡、已到彼岸、安稳立于陆地的婆罗门”为止,这部分是论母的安立。接下来是对这些论母的详细展开。“将成习气”,意思是将会成为能够熏习、带来习气的东西。就像说“犹如举起须弥山”等,这是在显示这部开示的不共特质与极其难行之处。显示巴利原文
238. Ye bhikkhū tadā bhagavantaṃ parivāretvā nisinnā, tesu keci ekavihārino, keci attadutiyā, keci attatatiyā, keci attacatutthā, keci attapañcamā hutvā araññāyatanesu viharantīti vuttaṃ – ‘‘ekacārika…pe… pañcacārike’’ti. Samānajjhāsayatā sabhāgavuttino. Kammaṭṭhānānuyuñjanassa kārake. Tato eva tattha yuttapayutte. Puggalajjhāsayena kāraṇabhūtena. Paccayabhūtanti apassayabhūtaṃ. ‘‘Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave’’ti ārabhitvā yāva ‘‘tiṇṇo pāraṅgato thale tiṭṭhati brāhmaṇo’’ti ayaṃ mātikānikkhepo. Tesaṃ mātikāya vitthārabhājanaṃ. Vāsanā bhavissatīti vāsanāvahaṃ bhavissati. Sineruṃ ukkhipanto viyātiādi imissā desanāya anaññasādhāraṇatāya sudukkarabhāvadassanaṃ.
如同“床”以床的名称来指称,“本在口中的毒”便以“口”来称呼。因其能造成如干木般的性质,故称为“木”;因此,“木口”就是指通过咬等方式使人变得如同干木的蛇。又因为能导致类似干木的性质,也就是“木”那样的毒在它口中,所以也称为“木口”。依此类推,其余的名称也应当这样去理解其含义。“这四种”,是因毒的作用方式不同而分为四种。现在为了显示这些毒作用的差别,才说了“其中”等。「犹如被铁枪刺中」:指体内犹如被铁枪刺入一般。「如同熟烂的菠萝蜜」:就像过了时节,煮熟后腐坏的菠萝蜜果实。「在滤器中」:是指染布工人用来过滤碱水或过滤酒的器具。彻底断裂,便如同「雷击之处」。「以大钳」:是指用大钳子夹断。显示巴利原文
Mañcaṭṭhesu mañcasamaññā viya mukhaṭṭhaṃ visaṃ ‘‘mukha’’nti adhippetaṃ. Sukkhakaṭṭhasadisabhāvāpādanato ‘‘kaṭṭha’’nti vuccatīti kaṭṭhaṃ mukhaṃ etassāti kaṭṭhamukho, daṃsanādinā kaṭṭhasadisabhāvakaro sappo. Atha vā kaṭṭhasadisabhāvāpādanato kaṭṭhaṃ visaṃ vā mukhe etassāti kaṭṭhamukho. Iminā nayena sesapadesupi attho veditabbo. Ime cattāroti ime visakiccabhedena cattāro. Idāni taṃ nesaṃ visakiccabhedaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tesū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ayasūlasamappitaṃ viyāti abbhantare ayasūlaṃ anuppavesitaṃ viya. Pakkapūtipanasaṃ viyāti paccitvā kālātikkame kuthitapanasaphalaṃ viya. Caṅgavāreti rajakānaṃ khāraparissāvane surāparissāvane vā. Anavasesaṃ chijjanena asanipātaṭṭhānaṃ viya. Mahānikhādanenāti mahantena nikhādanena.
「以毒力变异故」:指由毒力发作所引起的变异。「风」:指接触该蛇身体后所升起的风。至于鼻风,就更不必说了。「依补特伽罗施设」:即依那十六种蛇的“来毒”等补特伽罗名称,各自再分为四种,因此成为六十四种。「来毒」:是指毒来得快,迅速上身的毒。「猛毒」:毒性猛烈,极为难治。这种毒如同冷水,以极难摆脱为特性。因为水蛇确实有猛毒,所以说「如同水蛇等的毒」。「显现」:是指通过疮、疱等方式显现出来。名为「无垢蛇」的,就是指大毒蛇。名为「青蛇」的,其色如树枝,指在树顶等处游走的蛇。「依此方法」:即是按照前面所说,在木口蛇中,将咬毒等分为“来毒而非猛毒”等四种分类的方法。「木口中有咬毒等」:在木口蛇中,有咬毒、触毒、风散毒这三种;而在腐口等各类中,咬毒等则各有四种,应当这样去了知。显示巴利原文
Visavegavikārenāti visavegagatena vikārena. Vātenāti tassa sappassa sarīraṃ phusitvā uggatavātena. Nāsavāte pana vattabbameva natthi. Puggalapaṇṇattivasenāti tesaṃyeva soḷasannaṃ sappānaṃ āgatavisotiādipuggalanāmassa vasena catusaṭṭhi honti paccekaṃ catubbidhabhāvato. Āgatavisoti āgacchaviso, sīghataraṃ abhiruhanavisoti attho. Ghoravisoti kakkhaḷaviso, duttikicchaviso. Ayaṃ sītaudakaṃ viya hoti gāḷhadubbinimmocayabhāvena. Udakasappo hi ghoraviso hoti yevāti vuttaṃ – ‘‘udakasappādīnaṃ visaṃ viyā’’ti. Paññāyatīti gaṇḍapiḷakādivasena paññāyati. Aneḷakasappo nāma mahāāsīviso. Nīlasappo nāma sākhavaṇṇo rukkhaggādīsu vicaraṇakasappo. Iminā upāyenāti yoyaṃ kaṭṭhamukhesu daṭṭhavisānaṃyeva ‘‘āgataviso no ghoraviso’’tiādinā catubbidhabhāvo vutto, iminā upāyena. Kaṭṭhamukhe daṭṭhavisādayoti kaṭṭhamukhesu daṭṭhaviso, phuṭṭhaviso, vātavibhoti tayo, pūtimukhādīsu ca daṭṭhavisādayo cattāro cattāro veditabbo.
「逐个地」:对这六十四种蛇逐一去理解。「四种」:是依卵生等分类方式分为四种。「五十六」:是指超过五十,还有五十六种。「已走过的道路」:按照前面所说的数量,若从后往前简略地计算,依序便只剩下四种。「以种姓而言」:是指以木口等的生类、出身来区分。显示巴利原文
Ekekanti catusaṭṭhiyo ekekaṃ. Catudhāti aṇḍajādivibhāgena catudhā vibhajitvā. Chapaṇṇāsānīti chapaṇṇāsādhikāni. Gatamaggassāti yathāvuttasaṅkhyāgatamaggassa paṭilomato saṃkhippamānā anukkamena cattārova honti. Kulavasenāti kaṭṭhamukhādijātivasena.
“触毒”即毒液仿佛被灌注并遍布全身而存留,也就是说它们(蛇)的风毒。“注入毒”等说法也是如此。在此,“蛇”(āsīvisa)一词的词义应依循词源学的方式来理解。“已升起的威光”(uggatatejā)指威光高昂猛烈,或指它们因自身的剧毒而具有凶残的特性。“难摧伏的毒”(dunnimmaddanavisā)即难以用咒术和药剂制伏的毒。在“四种蛇”(cattāro āsīvisā)这一句中,“iti”一词表示“等”之意,因此它在此处统括了经文的剩余部分。显示巴利原文
Sakalakāye āsiñcitvā viya ṭhapitavisāti hi tesaṃ phuṭṭhavisatā, vātavisatā vuccati. Evanti ‘‘āsittavisā’’tiādinā. Etthāti āsīvisasadde vacanattho niruttinayena veditabbo. Uggatatejāti udaggatejā, attano visatejena nesaṃ kurūradabbatā vā. Dunnimmaddanavisāti mantāgadehi animmaddanīyavisā. Cattāro āsīvisāti ettha iti-saddo ādiattho. Tenettha avasesapāḷiṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
“在毒蛇中”——应知这些毒蛇属于咬毒的类别。“就在身上安立”——因为那位男子对它们未曾造下任何不可意的事,且他尚有寿命,所以它们没有咬他,应当这样去体会这一层含义。他为了如实开示而发问。“难护理”即难以照顾、奉事。“安稳道”即达成安稳状态的方法。显示巴利原文
Āsīvisesūti ime āsīvisā daṭṭhavisā evāti veditabbā. Sarīraṭṭhakesuyevāti tena purisena tesaṃ kassaci aniṭṭhassa akatattā āyusesassa ca vijjamānattā naṃ na daṃsiṃsūti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Pucchi yathābhūtaṃ pavedetukāmo. Durupaṭṭhāhāti durupaṭṭhānā. Sotthimaggoti sotthibhāvassa upāyo.
所谓“内行者”,就是潜行于内部、伪装朋友、破坏信任的人,因此称他为“杀者”。为了显示他派遣她们的理由,方说“第一”等语。“犹如已至面前”意即迎面而来。世间语言运用中,也有类似的说法,如“将某人安置于寂静处”。因此,“已至面前”的意思就是“他已到达面前”。专指那块铺设在树下、供往来行人歇息安坐的弯曲平板。显示巴利原文
Antaracaroti antaraṃ caro sukhasattu vissāsaghātī. Tenāha ‘‘vadhako’’ti. Idāni tāsaṃ pesane kāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘paṭhama’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Abhimukhagataṃ viya abhimukhagataṃ. Īdisīpi hi vacoyutti loke nirūpīyati santiyaṃ purisaṃ ṭhapetīti viya. Tasmā abhimukhagatanti abhimukhaṃ tena sampattanti attho. Vaṅkasaṇṭhānaṃ phalakaṃ rukkhamūle āgatāgatānaṃ nisīdanatthāya atthataṃ.
「渡具」:因为那人手持船桨渡人过河,故称渡具。从此岸渡至彼岸的桥,称为彼岸桥。能容一人或两人通行的木桥,称为木桥。适合徒步者行走的桥,称为徒步桥。可供车辆通行的桥,称为车桥。这个婆罗门并非就「究竟义」而言。然而,为了显示其意义在某种程度上也存在而如此称呼,故说“因排除了这些敌人”。「开示」即所开示的教法。「令回转」即令其收回。「实未得」即确实未曾获得。显示巴利原文
Arittahattho puriso santāreti etāyāti santāraṇī. Orimatīrato uttaraṇāya setu uttarasetu. Ekena dvīhi vā gantabbo rukkhamayo setu rukkhasetu. Jaṅghasatthena gamanayoggo setu jaṅghasetu. Sakaṭena gantuṃ sakkuṇeyyo sakaṭasetu. Na kho esa brāhmaṇo paramatthato. Tadattho pana ekadesena sambhavatīti tathā vuttanti dassento ‘‘ettakānaṃ paccatthikānaṃ bāhitattā’’ti āha. Desananti uddesadesanaṃ. Vinivattentoti paṭisaṃharanto. Na laddho vatāsīti na laddho vata āsi.
业犹如国王,因为它在众生中显示出主宰力。国王……乃至凡夫,因为流转之苦即是罪过。「以智出离」:即由智慧而出离,这是由于厌离四大、离欲、想要解脱而生起的智慧出离,是通过证得圣道而成就的智慧出离。如此,此处譬喻的契合便臻于极致。显示巴利原文
Rājā viya kammaṃ sattesu issariyassa vattāpanato. Rājā…pe… puthujjano vaṭṭadukkhasaṅkhātāparādhatāya. Ñāṇapalāyanenāti mahābhūtehi nibbinditvā virajjitvā vimuccitukāmatāvasena uppannañāṇapalāyane maggādhigamasiddheneva ñāṇapalāyanena. Evañhettha upamāsaṃsandanaṃ matthakaṃ pāpitameva hoti.
“正如……”等,是对一部分教说集合的举例说明。以注释师的话来印证前面所说,例如「变得僵硬」等。其中,“以木口或”的“或”字表示譬喻义:如同被木口蛇咬后变得僵硬,同样,由于地界的扰乱,那个身体就好比木口;犹如进入木口而变得僵硬,这就是它的意思。或者,“或”字表示决定义,应与“地界的扰乱”相连:意思是——即使被木口蛇咬,身体也只是因为地界的扰乱才变得僵硬,因此,与地界不相离的那个身体,在任何时候都如同进入木口一般。或者,“或”字表示不定义,意思是:被木口蛇咬的身体,依靠咒药可能僵硬,也可能不僵硬;然而,由于地界的扰乱,如果没有咒药,那个身体就如同进入木口,必定僵硬。这里,「身」指寻常的身体。「腐坏」指被煮坏。「炽热」指全身炽热,达到极热。「切断」指完全割裂,成为粉碎。当身体达到僵硬等状态时,那人便犹如处在木口等蛇的口中,这是其意思。显示巴利原文
Yatheva hītiādinā ekadesanāsamudāyassa nidassanaṃ āraddhaṃ. Yathāvuttavacanaṃ aṭṭhakathācariyānaṃ vacanena samattheti ‘‘patthaddho bhavatī’’tiādinā. Tattha kaṭṭhamukhena vāti vā-saddo upamattho. Yathā kaṭṭhamukhena sappena daṭṭho patthaddho hoti, evaṃ pathavīdhātuppakopena so kāyo kaṭṭhamukheva hoti, kaṭṭhamukhagato viya patthaddho hotīti attho. Atha vā vā-saddo avadhāraṇattho. So ‘‘pathavīdhātupakopena vā’’ti evaṃ ānetvā sambandhitabbo. Ayañhettha attho – kaṭṭhamukhena daṭṭhopi kāyo pathavīdhātuppakopeneva patthaddho hoti, tasmā pathavīdhātuyā aviyutto so kāyo sabbadā kaṭṭhamukhagato viya hotīti. Vā-saddo vā aniyamattho. Tatrāyamattho – kaṭṭhamukhena daṭṭho kāyo patthaddho hoti vā, na vā mantāgadavasena. Pathavīdhātuppakopena pana mantāgadarahito so kāyo kaṭṭhamukhagato viya hoti ekantapatthaddhoti. Tattha kāyoti pakatikāyo. Pūtikoti kuthito. Santattoti sabbaso tatto mahādāhappatto. Sañchinnoti sabbaso chinno cuṇṇavicuṇṇabhūto. Yadā kāyo patthaddhādibhāvappatto hoti, tadā puriso kaṭṭhamukhādisappassa mukhe vattamāno viya hotīti attho.
「依差别」是指依木口等的差别,以及地等的差别。「为了让人对无义等产生厌离」等,是对于无心的大种,也像对待有心者那样,为了让无义等现前而能生起厌离,因而作了这样的开示。其中,「依住处」是指依其生起的处所。「这些」是指诸大种。「相似性」是指依住处相似,即依蚁丘、洞穴、丛林、垃圾堆等住处而相似。显示巴利原文
Visesatoti kaṭṭhamukhādivisesato ca pathavīādivisesato ca. Anatthaggahaṇatotiādi acetanesupi bhūtesu sacetanesu viya anatthādīnaṃ paccakkhatāya nibbedajananatthaṃ āraddhaṃ. Tattha āsayatoti pavattiṭṭhānato. Etesanti mahābhūtānaṃ. Sadisatāti vammikāsayasusiragahanasaṅkāraṭṭhānāsayatāya ca sadisatā.
「依自相」是指依各自不同的相。地界等的坚硬等特性,以及让具有那些特性的补特伽罗产生坚硬等,从而引发变异,应知这与毒力所引发的变异相似。显示巴利原文
Paccattalakkhaṇavasenāti visuṃ visuṃ lakkhaṇavasena. Pathavīādīnaṃ kakkhaḷabhāvādi, taṃsamaṅgino puggalassa kakkhaḷabhāvāpādanādinā vikāruppādanato visavegavikārato sadisatā veditabbā.
「无义」指灾祸。「病」指麻风等病。「于有喜生者」是指对于诸有中的出生感到欢喜的人。因为在五蕴有中,欢喜出生实即欢喜大种。显示巴利原文
Anatthāti byasanā. Byādhinti kuṭṭhādibyādhiṃ. Bhave jātābhinandinoti bhavesu jātiyā abhinandanasīlā. Pañcavokāre hi jātiyā abhinandanā nāma mahābhūtābhinandanā eva.
“更难扶养”即更难报答。“难以接近”即难以亲近。“我侍奉”是指他们无法上前亲近。我们完全了知那仅仅是业的名称,实际上并无施助者。“有无边的过患与灾祸”是说以无量的过患与灾祸为因。“单侧”是指单一的苦。显示巴利原文
Durupaṭṭhānatarānīti duppaṭikāratarāni. Durāsadāti durupasaṅkamanā. ‘‘Upaṭṭhāmī’’ti upasaṅkamituṃ na sakkonti. Parijānāma kammanāmāni, upakārā nāma natthi. Anantadosūpaddavatoti aparimāṇadosūpaddavahetuto. Ekapakkhalanti ekadukkhaṃ.
色蕴坏灭时,因四个非色蕴与其一同坏灭,故它便带着四个非色蕴一起坏灭。在五蕴有中,当非色蕴坏灭时,由于色蕴无法独立安住,故也带着依处色一同坏灭。仅以生起贪欲这一点,便说“智之首已堕”。因为智慧在有身中为最上之首,于善法中最为殊胜,当烦恼生起时智慧便不生起,所以说:“仅以贪欲生起,智慧之首即已坠落。”当与之相应的业缘存在时,便导向各趣。诸如“生之怖畏、老之怖畏、死之怖畏、贼之怖畏”等所出的二十五种大怖畏,以及“他们砍手”等所出的三十二种业行,由于因缘具足安立,这些怖畏与业行便已出现。对于行蕴有喜贪,这是因为喜贪摄在行蕴之中,故如此说。显示巴利原文
Rūpakkhandhobhijjamāno cattāro arūpakkhandhe gahetvāva bhijjati arūpakkhandhānaṃ ekanirodhattā. Vatthurūpampi gahetvāva bhijjanti pañcavokāre arūpakkhandhesu bhinnesu rūpakkhandhassa avaṭṭhānābhāvato. Ettāvatāti lobhuppādanamattena. Paññā nāma attabhāve uttamaṅgaṃ paññuttarattā kusaladhammānaṃ, sati ca kilesuppattiyaṃ paññāya anuppajjanato vuttaṃ – ‘‘ettāvatā paññāsīsaṃ patitaṃ nāma hotī’’ti. Yoniyo upaneti tadupagassa kammapaccayassa bhāve. ‘‘Jātibhayaṃ, jarābhayaṃ, maraṇabhayaṃ, corabhaya’’ntiādinā āgatāni pañcavīsati mahābhayāni, ‘‘hatthampi chindatī’’tiādinā āgatāni dvattiṃsa kammakāraṇāni āgatāneva honti kāraṇassa samavaṭṭhitattā. Nandīrāgo saṅkhārakkhandhoti saṅkhārakkhandhapariyāpannattā vuttaṃ.
这便是巴利圣典中已有的“诸比丘,纵使从眼处……”等说法。“不得任何”:在那空村的譬喻中,以贼无所得之说,便已同时表明此人自身的皈依处亦不可得,故不再另行举出。比丘喻如人,贼则喻如外处。“专注而修”指修习观禅的专注投入。由于开示是依内处宣说的,故说明为“依所造色的业处”。显示巴利原文
Pāḷiyaṃyeva āgatā ‘‘cakkhuto cepi naṃ, bhikkhave’’tiādinā. Kiñci alabhitvāti tasmiṃ suññagāme corānaṃ gayhūpagassa alābhavacaneneva tassa purisassa attano paṭisaraṇassa alābho vutto eva hotīti na uddhaṭo, purisaṭṭhāniyo bhikkhu, corā pana bāhirāyatanaṭṭhāniyā. Abhinivisitvāti vipassanābhinivesaṃ katvā. Ajjhattikāyatanavasena desanāya āgatattā vuttaṃ ‘‘upādārūpakammaṭṭhānavasenā’’ti.
「外」指外处。「五种所作」指那时贼所应做的五种事。「手中之财」指自己手中应取的珍贵财物。他们以打落等方式进行手触。打击之处,即被打之处。他们说「正是在那刹那,如理地」。舍弃能带来安乐的善法,而具足带来痛苦的恶不善法,就好比有人舍弃能带来安乐的财物而外出游走,因为善法是乐的依处,故如此说。发生手触等行为的时刻,是善德之身被当时的放逸所损害的时分。遭受打击等行为的时刻,是从那以后善德之身更沉重地被损害的时分。遭受打击等后,成为「非沙门」的时刻,是善德之身如同达到死亡的时分。其余人应当以奴仆的受用方式过活,因此以转变为其他状态、落入在家人的身份作为譬喻而说。凡是当所缘于六门出现时所说的,正是依于彼所缘,当知将会有来世的苦蕴,这是其中的连结。显示巴利原文
Bāhirānanti bāhirāyatanānaṃ. Pañca kiccānīti corehi tadā kātabbāni pañca kiccāni. Hatthasāranti attano santake hatthehi gahetabbasārabhaṇḍaṃ. Pātanādivasena hatthaparāmāsaṃ karonti. Pahāraṭhāneti pahaṭaṭṭhāne. Ṭhānaso tasmiṃ eva khaṇeti vadanti. Attano sukhāvahaṃ kusaladhammaṃ pahāya dukkhāvahena akusalena samaṅgitā sukhāvahaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ pahāya bahi nikkhamanaṃ viyāti vuttaṃ sukhanissayattā tassa. Hatthaparā…pe… āpajjanakālo guṇasarīrassa tadā pamādena bādhitattā. Pahāra…pe… kālo tato daḷhataraṃ guṇasarīrassa bādhitattā. Pahāraṃ…pe… assamaṇakālo guṇasarīrassa maraṇappattisadisattā. Avasesajanassa dāsaparibhogena paribhuñjitabbatā aññathattappattigihibhāvāpattiyā nidassanabhāvena vuttā. Yaṃ ‘‘chasu dvāresu ārammaṇe āpāthagate’’ti vuttaṃ, tameva ārammaṇaṃ nissāya samparāyiko dukkhakkhandho veditabboti yojanā.
「色等」指色、声、香、味。它们,指如上所说的大种与所造色。「以轻快性等」即通过他们之轻快性等。「难渡处」即无法渡越之处,为瀑流处。「以所说的方法」即依「相应的受是受蕴」等所说方式。「以四界等」,「等」字包含了取蕴等。「为了显示心的作用」即为了显示心的策励。也就是已经说过的精进,即于圣道中称为「正精进」者。「善一夜者等」即如「今日应作之精勤」等所说的《善一夜者经》等。显示巴利原文
Rūpādīnīti rūpasaddagandharasāni. Tesanti yathāvuttabhūtupādārūpānaṃ. Lahutādivasenāti tesaṃ lahutādivasena. Duruttaraṇaṭṭhoti uttarituṃ asakkuṇeyyabhāvo oghaṭṭho. Vuttanayenāti ‘‘sampayuttā vedanā vedanākkhandho’’tiādinā vuttanayena. Catumahābhūtādīhīti ādisaddena upādānakkhandhādīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ. Cittakiriyadassanatthanti cittapayogadassanatthaṃ. Vuttavāyāmamevāti ‘‘sammāvāyāmo’’ti yo ariyamagge vutto. Bhaddekarattādīnīti ‘‘ajjeva kiccaṃ ātappa’’ntiādinā (ma. ni. 3.272, 275, 276) vuttāni bhaddekarattasuttādīni.
「跛脚者」指如同断足之人,丧失了行走的能力。「系缚于心」指将作用紧密地系缚于心上。心在其中决意:「此圣道是我渡越瀑流的方法」,进而又于彼道上持续转起、策励精进,这便是对心的系缚。显示巴利原文
Kuṇṭhapādoti chinnapādova hutvā gativikalo. Mānasaṃ bandhatīti tasmiṃ citte kiccaṃ nibandhati. ‘‘Ayaṃ ariyamaggo mayhaṃ oghuttaranupāyo’’ti tattha cittassa sanniṭṭhānaṃ puna tattha pavattanaṃ vīriyārambho cittabandhanaṃ.
对于那名色,将这些喜贪等、渴爱与无明等作为它的缘,这属于法处的一部分。在此经中,除了圣道、涅槃、渴爱之外的法,都归入法处的一部分。「以十六种行相」即以压迫等十六种行相来观察。「依六万种行相」即依照《念处分别》中所阐明的方法,以六万种行相来观察。在开示结束时……他们安住于果。此处特别指出,那些「了悟广说者」通过把握的方式证得殊胜,因此被标示出来,因为他们当时是以法领受者的身份亲近导师的。至于「了悟略说者」和「需被引导者」证得殊胜的情况,在注疏中并不通用,所以此处没有采用。显示巴利原文
Tassa nāmarūpassa ime nandīrāgādayo taṇhāvijjādayoti katvā paccayo dhammāyatanekadeso. Ariyamagganibbānataṇhāvajjo idha dhammāyatanekadesoti ca. Soḷasahākārehīti pīḷanādīhi soḷasahi ākārehi. Satipaṭṭhānavibhaṅge āgatanayena saṭṭhinayasahassehi. Desanāpariyosāne…pe… patiṭṭhahiṃsūti vipañcitaññū evettha gahaṇavasena adhigatavisesā paricchinditā. Te hi tadā dhammapaṭiggāhakabhāvena satthu santike sannisinnā. Ugghaṭitaññūnaṃ pana neyyānañca visesādhigamo aṭṭhakathāyaṃ na ruḷhoti idha na gahitoti.
2. 《车譬喻经》的注释显示巴利原文
2. Rathopamasuttavaṇṇanā
239 239. 对于善护根门、饮食知量、具念、正知而住的比丘,说到:烦恼相的苦不再有机会生起,如此便成就了多乐与多喜悦。如同与果混合一般,那便是根本,成了纯一味的因。「他的」指比丘的。「圆满」指无有缺失。「无余灭尽诸漏」即漏尽,是最高的道。「那行」指在缓慢、中等、迅速等不同方式中的行走。「为了守护」即为了防护烦恼贼。「为了控制速度」即为了控制以烦恼为因的根门躁动之速。「为了不随从」即为了停止随顺烦恼的散动。「为了寂止烦恼」即为了令烦恼层层向上寂灭、平息。显示巴利原文
239. Susaṃvutindriyassa bhojane mattaññuno satassa sampajānassa viharato kilesanimittaṃ dukkhaṃ anavasaranti sukhasomanassabahulatā vuttā. Yavati tena phalaṃ missitaṃ viya hotīti yoni, ekantikaṃ kāraṇaṃ. Assāti bhikkhuno. Paripuṇṇanti avikalaṃ. Anavasesaṃ āsave khepetīti āsavakkhayo, aggamaggo. Yaṃ yanti dandhaṃ majjhaṃ javoti javādīsu yaṃ yaṃ gamanaṃ. Rakkhaṇatthāyāti kilesacorehi rakkhaṇatthāya . Veganiggahaṇatthāyāti kilesahetukassa indriyavegassa niggaṇhanatthāya. Nibbisevanatthāyāti visevanassa vipphanditassa nirodhanāya. Kilesūpasamatthāyāti kilesānaṃ uparūpari samanatthāya vūpasamanatthāya.
「沙门之乐」是指止、观、道、果的快乐。即使已被调御的骏马,也可能因御者的鞭策而出现某些违逆;为了显示没有这种情况,所以称为「使之无乖违后放出」。「行于智」(智行)是说毫无滞碍地运转,更何况由于修习诸根已成就,烦恼的调伏是依快乐而达成的。依施主的意乐,所施之物有殊胜与低劣的差别;依相应法的分量,所施之物也有少与多的差别。显示巴利原文
Samaṇarati nāma samathavipassanāmaggaphalasukhāni. Dantānampi sindhavānaṃ sārathino payogena siyā kāci visevanamattāti tadabhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘nibbisevane katvā pesento’’ti vuttaṃ. Ñāṇaṃ gacchatīti asaṅgamanaṃ pavattati pageva indriyabhāvanāya katattā, kilesaniggahassa sukheneva siddhattā. Dāyakassa ajjhāsayo vaso uḷāro lāmako. Deyyadhammassa pamāṇaṃ vaso appakaṃ bahukañca.
“大帐处”是指铜殿正前方,大比丘僧团集会时,为容纳全体比丘所应搭建大帐之处。“取量器”即分派食物时所用的量器。显示巴利原文
Mahāmaṇḍapaṭṭhānaṃ nāma lohapāsādassa purato eva mahābhikkhusaṅghassa sannipātakāle tesaṃ pahonakavasena mahāmaṇḍapassa kattabbaṭṭhānaṃ. Gahaṇamānanti parivisagahaṇabhājanaṃ.
“于日常营办饮食之事中已得熟练的侍者优婆塞”,指在平时办理饮食事务中已善巧纯熟的侍者优婆塞。以“软、中、硬”为名的,或以“烧、煮、破”为名的三种调理方式。显示巴利原文
Pakatiyā bhattakārakicce adhigato upaṭṭhākupāsako. Mudusamakharasaññitehi, dahanapacanabhajjanasaññitehi vā tīhi pākehi.
“清净后”,指使其清净到合乎国王的身份之后。他把食物丢在地上,心想:“未施与比丘们,却被我放入了口中。”用口去接取,是为了显示此事并无过失。为令他了知食量而进行擦拭。当他问“你从哪里来”时,心生放逸。“随分”指剩余下来的部分。“此有义”指这是有需要的。“其余”指虽在圣典文句中未予明示,于未来所受用的食物亦应知量。显示巴利原文
Parisodhetvāti rañño anucchavikabhāvaṃ parisodhetvā. Bhūmiyaṃ chaḍḍesi ‘‘bhikkhūnaṃ adatvā mayā mukhe pakkhitta’’nti. Mukhena gaṇhi tassa niddosabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ. Mattaṃ jānāpetuṃ pamajji. ‘‘Tvaṃ kuto āgato’’ti pucchane pamādaṃ āpajji. Anubhāgoti avasiṭṭhabhāgo. Idamatthiyanti idaṃ payojanaṃ. Itaranti pāḷiyaṃ anāgatampi āhāre pamāṇajānanaṃ.
“卧”即是躺卧,“受用欲乐者的卧”称为受用欲乐者之卧。以右胁而卧时,由于右手无法执行应做之事,故实际上并不存在那样的卧姿。“由于威光殊胜”这句话,是为了显示这是无畏者的狮子卧姿而说。“将两只前足并置一处,两只后足并置一处”,这是为了显示双足不会散乱的状态。显示巴利原文
Sayanaṃ seyyā, kāmabhogīnaṃ seyyā kāmabhogiseyyā. Dakkhiṇapassena sayāno nāma natthi dakkhiṇahatthena kātabbakiccakaraṇato. Tejussadattāti idaṃ anutrāsasseva sīhassa sayananti dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Dve purimapāde ekasmiṃ, pacchimapāde ekasmiṃ ṭhāne ṭhapetvāti hi idaṃ pādānaṃ avikkhittabhāvakaraṇadassanaṃ.
“第四禅那之卧”是指属于第四禅的果等至。因为如来大多是先进入果等至,而后才躺卧的。解说者又说,这种卧姿是出第四禅那之后,因已证得烦恼般涅槃而采用的。这里所说的狮子卧,是指双足重叠、前后不相离特征的卧姿。因此说“此即是……”等等。“如是”是指如前所述“以右胁……”等方式来采取卧姿。显示巴利原文
Catutthajjhānaseyyāti catutthajjhānikaṃ phalasamāpattiṃ vadati. Yebhuyyena hi tathāgatā phalasamāpattiṃ samāpajjitvāva sayanti. Sā ca nesaṃ catutthajjhānato vuṭṭhāya, kilesaparinibbānassa ca katattāti vadanti . Idha sīhaseyyā āgatā pādaṃ accādhāya pubbenāparaṃ ajahitasaṃlakkhaṇā seyyāti katvā. Tenāha ‘‘ayaṃ hī’’tiādi. Evanti ‘‘dakkhiṇena passenā’’tiādinā vuttākārena seyyaṃ kappeti.
如何能在入睡时成为具念、正知的人呢?其意旨是:他是以有分心入眠的。所谓“不弃舍”,应理解为:由于他对此有所倾向,因此在那段时间亦未弃舍(念与正知)。同样,在他们入眠的初、中、后阶段,念与正知始终不忘失。因此说:“即使是入睡,也具念、正知。”而“这……”一句,是解说前面“即使是入睡,也具念、正知”这一理路。“它是智界吗?”对此他们并不认同;古代的长老们不认为即使在睡眠中,仍具有醒觉时那种运转着的智的体性。其意旨是:在有分心无间生起的过程中,念与正知不可能存在。因为在前述理路中,那只是念与正知的不律仪,并非有分心的不律仪。(实际上,)由“根律仪”、“于食知量”、“警寤勤修”这三者,以及回避相与细相等,这一切全部属于观的部分,这是其意旨所在。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃniddāyanto sato sampajāno hoti? Bhavaṅgacittena hi niddūpagamananti adhippāyo. Appahānenāti tadadhimuttatāya tadappahānaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tathā tesu niddokkamanassa ādipariyosānesu ajahitasatisampajaññaṃ hoti. Tenāha – ‘‘niddaṃ okkamantopi sato sampajāno hotī’’ti. Etaṃ panāti ‘‘niddaṃ okkamantopi sato sampajāno hotī’’ti vuttanayaṃ vadati. Ñāṇadhātukanti na rocayiṃsūti niddokkamanepi jāgaraṇe pavattañāṇasabhāvamevāti na rocayiṃsu porāṇā. Nirantaraṃ bhavaṅgacittesu vattamānesu satisampajaññāsambhavoti adhippāyo. Purimasmiñhi naye satisampajaññassa asaṃvaro, na bhavaṅgassa. Indriyasaṃvaro, bhojane mattaññutā, jāgariyānuyogoti imehi tivaṅgikā, nimittānubyañjanaparivajjanādi sabbaṃ vipassanāpakkhikamevāti adhippāyo.
「那些」即是指在观的那一刹那中生起的根等诸法。这一开示应当详细地解说,直到阿拉汉果为止。不过,在圣典的文句中,则简略地表述为「而他的如理作意已精勤于诸漏的灭尽」。显示巴利原文
Tānevāti vipassanākkhaṇe pavattāni indriyādīni. Yāva arahattā desanā vitthārato kathetabbā. Pāḷiyaṃ pana ‘‘yoni cassa āraddhā hoti āsavānaṃ khayāyā’’ti saṅkhepena kathitā.
3. 《龟喻经》注疏显示巴利原文
3. Kummopamasuttavaṇṇanā
240 「骨龟」是指背部有尖锐骨头的龟。「被绳所缚」是指忙碌。如同把肢体收入盒子中一般,收入自己的颅壳中。「收集」是指正确地放置,唯向内放置。「在所缘颅骨中」是指在所缘的釜中。「收集者」是指仅从所见取其相后,把心的思虑正确地安放在那上面。因为他不让那思虑以所缘的方式活动起来。当说到「五法」时,即是指「我会在适当的时候开示……」等(《无碍解道》362)所说。显示巴利原文
240.Aṭṭhikummoti piṭṭhiyaṃ tikhiṇaṭṭhiko kummo. Tantibandhoti byāvaṭo. Samugge viya attano kapāle pakkhipitvā. Samodahanto sammā odahanto ajjhattameva dahanto. Ārammaṇakapāleti ārammaṇakaṭāhe. Samodahantoti diṭṭhamattasseva ca gahaṇato manovitakke tattheva sammadeva odahanto. Tañhi visayavasena pavattituṃ adento. Pañca dhammeti ‘‘kālena vakkhāmī’’tiādinā (pari. 362) vuccamāne.
第四《初木堆喻经》注疏显示巴利原文
4. Paṭhamadārukkhandhopamasuttavaṇṇanā
241 如同游戏一般到达大海。「内枝」是指在恒河岸边向内侧下垂的树枝。「湿润」是指变得湿润。由于那树枝横倒下来,如同木桥一般横在那里,由此成为大众的依靠;并且,正因为它极为巨大,才不会被恒河的流水冲走等。显示巴利原文
241.Vilāsamāno viya sāgaraṃ patvā. Antosākhoti gaṅgāya tīrassa anto onatasākho. Temetīti tinto hoti. Tiriyaṃ patito daṇḍasetu viya ṭhitattā mahājanassa paccayo jāto, tathā mahantabhāvena gaṅgāsotaṃ otaraṇādi natthi.
「此即」,指前文所说之人。「进入圣道」,即进入四种圣道之路。以“心名为……”等思虑之后,不放弃在家束缚,这是连接关系。「对自己亲近者」,指对自己亲近的人。「营生」,为生计所应运用之田地、宅舍等;由此营生生起的收入。虽比丘为乞食而运用身体。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃhīti anantaraṃ vuttapuggalo. Ariyamaggaṃ oruyhāti catubbidhaṃ ariyamaggavīthiṃ otaritvā. ‘‘Cittaṃ nāmeta’’ntiādinā cintetvā gihibandhanaṃ na vissajjetīti sambandho. Attano bhajamānaketi attano bhajante. Jīvikatthāya payujjitabbato payogo, khettavatthādi. Tato payogato uṭṭhitaṃ āyaṃ. Kiñcāpi bhikkhūnaṃ kāyasāmaggiṃ deti bhikkhatthāya.
「破唇瓶」:唇口破损的瓶。「于肩」:在肩上。「僧伽受用」:前往僧伽所受用的村落。「就意义上如此说」:因具有那样的意义,便如同这样说。「仅以粥」:指喝了粥,由于该粥未消化,又咽下另一碗粥——这是连接关系。显示巴利原文
Muṇḍaghaṭanti bhinnoṭṭhaṃ ghaṭaṃ. Khandheti aṃse. Saṅghabhoganti saṅghasantakaṃ bhogagāmaṃ gantvā. Atthato evaṃ vadantīti tathā atthassa sambhavato evaṃ vadantā viya honti. Yāgumattake yāgunti yāguṃ pivitvā tāya aparipakkāya eva aññaṃ yāguṃ ajjhoharitvāti sambandho.
「随烦恼染着者」:由于没有如理作意,心唯随顺烦恼而转。「瞪眼」:因嗔怒而睁大眼睛,瞪眼行走。他掉举,不得平息。显示巴利原文
Kilesānurañjitovāti yonisomanasikārassa abhāvena kilesānugatacitto eva. Akkhīni nīharitvāti kodhavasena akkhike karonto akkhīni nīharitvā vicarissati. Uddhato hoti avūpasanto.
「堕于见者」:指这些教内之人,不如理思惟后,将教法扭曲为非正法、非律而宣扬,正如阿梨咤一样。因此说「他确实……」等等。在无色有中,若不存在色,那么从彼处死没的众生,色蕴又如何能生起呢?在无想有中存在心,这里也是同样的道理。出世间道具有多个心刹那,正如「若有人修习此四念处七年……」等所说。随眠与心不相应,否则,有过失和无过的法便会同时生起。那些有情流转轮回,否则业与果的关联便不成立。如此宣说时,便是执取了邪说而宣扬。显示巴利原文
Diṭṭhigatikoti sāsaniko evaṃ ayoniso ummujjitvā sāsanaṃ uddhammaṃ ubbinayaṃ katvā dīpento ariṭṭhasadiso. Tenāha ‘‘so hī’’tiādi. Arūpabhave rūpaṃ atthi, aññathā tato cutassa kuto rūpakkhandhassa sambhavo. Asaññībhave cittaṃ atthīti etthāpi eseva nayo. Bahucittakkhaṇiko lokuttaramaggo ‘‘yo ime cattāro satipaṭṭhāne bhāveyya sattavassānī’’tiādivacanato (dī. ni. 2.404; ma. ni. 1.137). Anusayo cittavippayutto, aññathā sāvajjānavajjadhammānaṃ ekajjhaṃ uppatti siyā. Te ca sattā sandhāvanti saṃsaranti, aññathā kammaphalānaṃ sambandho na siyāti. Iti vadanto evaṃ micchāvādaṃ paggayha vadanto.
如同浸水的树……难以得闻法之人,虽以信的滋润来润泽,却未能浸润。「已学律者」:指已经学律的人,犹如「已学明者」一般。「应将应施法分配给说法者」:即应将此应施法,根据各位说法者尊者的适当情形而分配,此是以转交的方式而说。日间说法者与诵经者,在傍晚说法;而于初夜分说法的夜间说法者,是指诵经者本人。显示巴利原文
Temanarukkho viya…pe… dullabhadhammassavano ca puggalo saddhāsinehena atemanato. Katavinayo sikkhitavinayo yathā ‘‘katavijjo’’ti. Dhammakathikānaṃvicārethāti idaṃ deyyadhammaṃ dhammakathikānaṃ ayyānaṃ tassa tassa yuttavasena vicārethāti niyyātanavasena vatvā. Divākathiko sarabhāṇako sāyanhe katheti, purimayāmaṃ kathento rattikathiko bhāṇakapuggalo.
「如欢喜园般愉悦」:如同欢喜园一般令人愉悦。他的负重比丘:指为他承担事务的比丘们,如亲教师等。听了以亲切款待的谈话为前导,继而安坐交谈的法语。显示巴利原文
Nandanavanābhirāmeti nandanavanaṃ viya manorame. Assa bhārahārabhikkhūti assa kiccavāhakabhikkhū upajjhāyādayo. Sukhanisinnakathanti paṭisanthārakathāpubbakaṃ upanisinnakathaṃ sutvā.
所谓“以住立之相状”,即仅处于住立的形态,这便是“未应用”的意思。心、业、根等也是以住立之相状而住立,如此结合。“由于柔和”:因为心的柔和而有所顾念。显示巴利原文
Ṭhitasaṇṭhāneneva ṭhitākāreneva ṭhitaṃ, nappayuttanti attho. Cittakammamūlādīni ṭhitasaṇṭhāneneva ṭhitāti yojanā. Mudutāyāti muduhadayatāya sāpekkhatāya.
“行道”:指止观的修行。“已阐明、已显示、已彰显”:意思是已经阐明、显示、公开了。“彼处生”:指在那里生起的寿。这是就田地而说的。手持油罐、蜜罐、糖罐等的人们。他们因为恶行而离去。“充满”:由于古注中有所提及,下面及各处的过去世言辞便这样被述说。显示巴利原文
Paṭipadanti samathavipassanāpaṭipattiṃ. Dīpetvā pakāsetvā pākaṭaṃ katvā. Tatruppādoti tatra uppajjanakaāyuppādo. Khettaṃ sandhāya vadati. Tela…pe… hatthāti telaghaṭa-madhughaṭaphāṇitaghaṭādihatthā. Apakkamiṃsu dubbicāritattā. Pūresīti heṭṭhā ca tattha tattha atītāni kālavacanāni porāṇaṭṭhakathāya āgatattā kira vuttāni.
“接近与不接近等”:指对此岸与彼岸的接近、不接近,以及在中间的沉没。“为通达”:即为了了知。“此”:指如前所说的眼的自性。“忧”:即以那微劣状态为缘的忧。即使在生起时,也称为接近,因为已经引起了彼相的染污。“三种相”:因为有而后无,故为有限;是暂时的;又破除了常等之见。如此,依三种相的随观而说。显示巴利原文
Upagamanānupagamanādīni orimassa pārimassa ca upagamanānupagamanāni ceva majjhe saṃsīdanāni ca. Paṭivijjhitunti jānituṃ. Etanti yathāvuttaṃ cakkhusabhāvaṃ. Domanassanti tasseva mandabhāvapaccayaṃ domanassaṃ. Āpajjantopi upagacchati nāma tannimittasaṃkilesassa uppāditattā. Tiṇṇaṃ lakkhaṇānanti hutvā abhāvato ādiantavantato tāvakālikato niccapaṭikkhepatotiādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ lakkhaṇānaṃ sallakkhaṇavasena.
“左”,指邪。“右”,指正。正如由于每个众生自身属于内在,故将内处说为此岸;同样,由于它们属于外在,故将外处说为彼岸。因为喜贪是在恶趣中间流转之因,所以被称为“中间沉没”。显示巴利原文
Vāmatoti micchā. Dakkhiṇatoti sammā. Yathā tassa tassa sattassa orabhāvattā ajjhattikāni āyatanāni orimaṃ tīraṃ katvā vuttāni, evaṃ nesaṃ parabhāvattā bāhirāni āyatanāni pārimaṃ vuttāni. Apāyamajjhe saṃsaraṇahetutāya nandīrāgova ‘‘majjhe saṃsādo’’ti vutto.
“高”:指以“我优胜”等而陷入自我抬高的人。在自我赞叹中,借着粪扫衣者的身份来燃烧自己,这应当理解为一种伪饰。此处所说的“难道是石头?是树桩吗?”应理解为与需被抓住的木桩相似。显示巴利原文
Unnatoti ‘‘seyyohamasmī’’tiādinā unnatiṃ upagato. Attukkaṃsane paṃsukūlikabhāvena attānaṃ dahanato aññākāratāgahetabbo. Pāsāṇo nu kho esa khāṇukoti gahetabbadārukkhandhasadiso vutto.
“成粉碎”:因为漩涡的力量极强而粉身碎骨。所谓“在四恶趣中”,是指落入五欲漩涡的人,即使在人界,也会由于功德之身崩坏,长久地成为粉碎;正因为他如此陷入,所以才会投生于那样的恶趣之中。显示巴利原文
Cuṇṇavicuṇṇaṃhoti āvaṭṭavegassa balavabhāvato. Catūsu apāyesūti pañcakāmaguṇāvaṭṭe patitapuggalo manussalokepi guṇasarīrabhedanena dīgharattaṃ cuṇṇavicuṇṇaṃ āpajjatiyeva, tassa tathā āpannattā. Evañhi so apāyesu tādisesu jāyati.
戒本身并无所谓‘恶’,故此处的‘du-’音节表‘无’义,因而说「无戒者」。正如‘恶事易以恶成’等句中,‘恶’为低劣的同义词,故此处说「低劣法」。‘不清净’是指由身、语、意三方面不清净。‘由疑惧’是说因自己的怀疑,或记起他人的威仪作为而生疑虑。因此说‘所以他……’等。所谓他进入那些业,指的是进入造作那些业的人群中。‘功德腐败故’,是说本来被视为功德的戒与法,达到了被染污的状态。‘生于垃圾者’,指内在已滋生了垃圾的人,或说他本身就是垃圾。显示巴利原文
Sīlassa duṭṭhaṃ nāma natthi, tasmā abhāvattho idha du-saddoti āha ‘‘nissīlo’’ti. ‘‘Pāpaṃ pāpena sukara’’ntiādīsu (udā. 48) viya pāpa-saddo nihīnapariyāyoti āha ‘‘lāmakadhammo’’ti. Na sucīti kāyavācācittehi na suci. Saṅkāya vāti attano vā saṅkāya paresaṃ samācārakiriyaṃ sarati āsaṅkati. Tenāha ‘‘tassa hī’’tiādi. Tāni kammāni pavisatīti tāni kammāni karontānaṃ antare pavisati. Guṇānaṃ pūtibhāvenāti guṇabhāvena gahitānaṃ sīladhammānaṃ saṃkiliṭṭhabhāvappattiyā. Kacavarajātoti abbhantaraṃ sañjātakacavaro, kacavarabhūto vā.
「无债出家」的意思是,唯有无债者才得出家。因为已阐明靠近或不靠近此岸等的道理,所以此处实已宣说了流转与还灭。显示巴利原文
Aṇaṇā pabbajjāti aṇaṇasseva pabbajjā. Orimatīrādīnaṃ upagamanānupagamanādīnaṃ jotitattā vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ kathitaṃ.
第二树干譬喻经注释。显示巴利原文
5. Dutiyadārukkhandhopamasuttavaṇṇanā
242 凡是可出罪、可发露的罪,从覆藏之时起,便因成障碍而名为‘杂染’。然而,一经发露,则住立于无犯处,故名为‘非杂染’。因此说:‘发露已,彼得轻安。’此种杂染,或因覆藏,或因粗重性而成为杂染。显示巴利原文
242. Yā āpatti vuṭṭhānagāminī desanāgāminī, taṃ paṭicchāditakālato paṭṭhāya saṃkiliṭṭhā nāma antarāyikabhāvato. Āvīkatā pana anāpattiṭṭhāne tiṭṭhatīti asaṃkiliṭṭhā nāma. Tenāha – ‘‘āvīkatā hissa phāsu hotī’’ti. Evarūpaṃ saṃkiliṭṭhanti paṭicchāditatāya vā duṭṭhullabhāvena vā saṃkiliṭṭhaṃ.
6. 漏泄品经注释显示巴利原文
6. Avassutapariyāyasuttavaṇṇanā
243 “Santhāgāra”(集会堂),即通知集会的堂舍。因此说“在出发时等”等,其中的“等”字应知包含了吉祥大会等。“Santharanti”意为休息,即消除疲劳。“Sahā”指因集会而共聚一处。应知“santhāgāra”一词,是在“saha atthānusāsanaṃ agāraṃ”(共为义利教诫的堂舍)这一意义上,将ttha音转为ntha而称说的;首先,在那里为审议而商议,这一行为即是“santharanti”。显示巴利原文
243.Santhāgāranti saññāpanāgāraṃ. Tenāha ‘‘uyyogakālādīsū’’tiādi. Ādi-saddena maṅgalamahādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Santharantīti vissamanti , parissamaṃ vinodentīti attho. Sahāti sannipātavasena ekajjhaṃ. Saha atthānusāsanaṃ agāranti tasmiṃ atthe ttha-kārassa ntha-kāraṃ katvā ‘‘santhāgāra’’nti vuccatīti daṭṭhabbaṃ, paṭhamaṃ tattha sammantanavasena santharanti vicārentīti attho.
三藏佛语自然将会到来,因此以佛语的到来为先导,也就宣说了圣果法的到来。在那三夜中,安住其处者,当会有果等至的转起。而且,在那比丘僧团中,善法比丘、善凡夫们都在精勤修习观禅,因此圣道法自然也会在那里到来。显示巴利原文
Tepiṭakaṃ buddhavacanaṃ āgatameva bhavissatīti buddhavacanassa āgamanasīsena ariyaphaladhammānampi āgamanaṃ vuttameva. Tiyāmarattiṃ tattha vasantānaṃ phalasamāpattivaḷañjanaṃ hotīti. Tasmiñca bhikkhusaṅghe kalyāṇadhammā kalyāṇaputhujjanā vipassanaṃ ussukkāpentā hontīti ariyamaggadhammānampi tattha āgamanaṃ hotiyeva.
“Allagomayena”:指用清澈的湿牛粪水。“Opuñjāpetvā”:即涂抹。“Catujjātiyagandhehi”:指以郁金香、土沉香、大麦花、多揭罗叶制成的四种香。“Nānāvaṇṇe”:指种种颜色,如蓝色等,并因墙壁的差别而有种种形状的图画。有人说:“Mahāpiṭṭhikakojaveti”是指铺在象背等处、被称为“大座垫”的毡毯,但这话是针对精致的织品说的;也有人说是具有四指厚立体花纹的大座垫毡毯。“Hatthattharaassattharā”:是铺在象背、马背上,并绣有象、马图案的铺设物;狮子铺等则是绣有狮子等图案的铺设物;彩绘铺设是以种种图形及种种花鬘工艺等装饰的铺设物。显示巴利原文
Allagomayenāti acchena allagomayarasena. Opuñjāpetvāti vilimpetvā. Catujjātiyagandhehīti kuṅkumaturukkhayavanapupphatamālapattagandhehi. Nānāvaṇṇeti nīlādivasena nānāvaṇṇe, bhittivisesavasena nānāsaṇṭhānarūpe. ‘‘Mahāpiṭṭhikakojaveti hatthipiṭṭhiādīsu attharitabbatāya ‘mahāpiṭṭhikā’ti laddhasamaññe kojave’’ti vadanti. Kuttake pana sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ, ‘‘caturaṅgulādhikapupphā mahāpiṭṭhikakojavā’’tipi vadanti. Hatthattharaassattharā hatthiassapiṭṭhīsu attharitabbā hatthiassarūpavicittā ca attharakā. Sīhattharakādayo pana sīharūpādivicittā eva attharakā. Cittattharakaṃ nānāvidharūpehi ceva nānāvidhamālākammādīhi ca vicittaṃ attharakaṃ.
「Upadhāna」指靠枕。「Upadahitvā」即作为倚靠而放置。以香制成的花环称为香鬘;以多揭罗叶等制成的花环称为叶鬘。由「等」字所摄,尚含以朱砂、笃耨香、柚木果、柚木花等制成的花环。以结跏趺座形制成的坐具,名为结跏趺座椅。三面有靠背或仅一面有靠背的,为有靠椅;无靠背的,为无靠椅。「Yojanāvaṭṭe」指方圆一由旬的范围。显示巴利原文
Upadhānanti apassayanaṃ. Upadahitvāti apassayayoggabhāvena ṭhapetvā. Gandhehi katamālā gandhadāmaṃ. Tamālapattādīhi katamālā pattadāmaṃ. Ādi-saddena hiṅgulatakkolajātiphalajātipupphādīhi katadāmaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Pallaṅkākārena katapīṭhaṃ pallaṅkapīṭhaṃ. Tīsu passesu ekapasse eva vā saupassayaṃ apassayapīṭhaṃ. Anapassayaṃ muṇḍapīṭhaṃ. Yojanāvaṭṭeti yojanaparikkhepokāse.
「Saṃvidhāyā」指将安陀会的边角与其余部分整理平整后穿着。因此说「犹如以剪刀裁剪莲花」,以及「覆盖三轮」。因为诸佛的威仪端庄与相好庄严一样,皆至极顶,所以注疏为显示世尊当时那般庄严,而说「以金腰带」等。其中,「以无与伦比的佛衣」等描述,意在表明:当时世尊为激发聚集的天、人、龙、夜叉、乾闼婆等的信心,且无隐藏佛威神力之必要,便以自身本具威仪入迦毗罗卫城。因诸佛身光本性常遍照约八十肘范围,故说「遍照八十肘」。佛陀的六色光明即蓝、黄、红、白、绯、光辉这几种。显示巴利原文
Saṃvidhāyāti antaravāsakassa koṇapadesaṃ itarapadesañca samaṃ katvā vidhāya. Tenāha – ‘‘kattariyā padumaṃ kantento viyā’’ti, ‘‘timaṇḍalaṃ paṭicchādento’’ti ca. Yasmā buddhānaṃ rūpasampadā viya ākappasampadāpi paramukkaṃsataṃ gatā, tasmā tadā bhagavā evaṃ sobheyyāti dassento ‘‘suvaṇṇapāmaṅgenā’’tiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘asamena buddhavesenā’’tiādinā tadā bhagavā buddhānubhāvassa niguhane kāraṇābhāvato tattha sannipatitadevamanussanāgayakkhagandhabbādīnaṃ pasādajananatthaṃ attano sabhāvapakatiyāva kapilavatthuṃ pāvisīti dasseti. Buddhānaṃ kāyapabhā nāma pakatiyā asītihatthamattapadesaṃ visaratīti āha ‘‘asītihatthaṭṭhānaṃ aggahesī’’ti. Nīlapītalohitodātamañjiṭṭhapabhassarānaṃ vasena chabbaṇṇā buddharasmiyo.
「Sabbapāliphulloti」指从根部直至枝梢,全面盛开、绽放。所谓「次第安放」等,是一种假想譬喻,意为:犹如……被庄严之物格外耀眼,世尊亦如此辉耀,因他由三十种波罗蜜所成就,故如此光彩照人。有人说「二十五条恒河」是指:那条在入海口分作百道而流的大恒河,以及那些大大小小河流,共二十五条。在《破群那》(《中部注》2.22)中说「二十五条河流」,是指恒河等直至月轮河的二十五条大河,这也只是假想之说。「Sambhijjāti」指混合、会合,即在入海口汇入大海之处。显示巴利原文
Sabbapāliphulloti mūlato paṭṭhāya yāva sākhaggā samantato phullo vikasito. Paṭipāṭiyā ṭhapitānantiādi parikappūpamā, yathā taṃ…pe… alaṅkataṃ aññaṃ virocati, evaṃ virocittha, samatiṃsāya pāramitāhi abhisaṅkhatattā evaṃ virocitthāti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Pañcavīsatiyā gaṅgānanti satamukhā hutvā samuddaṃ paviṭṭhāya mahāgaṅgāya mahantamahantānaṃ gaṅgānaṃ pañcavīsatī’’ti vadanti. Papañcasūdaniyaṃ (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.22) ‘‘pañcavīsatiyā nadīna’’nti vuttaṃ, gaṅgādīnaṃ candabhāgāpariyosānānaṃ pañcavīsatiyā mahānadīnanti attho. Parikappavacanañhetaṃ. Sambhijjāti sambhedaṃ missībhāvaṃ patvā mukhadvāreti samuddaṃ paviṭṭhaṭṭhāne.
「龙、金翅鸟、乾闼婆、夜叉等」乃依假想而说。「Sahassenā」意指一千个偈颂,相当于一个诵分的篇幅。显示巴利原文
Nāgasupaṇṇagandhabbayakkhādīnantiādi parikappavasena vuttaṃ. Sahassenāti padasahassena, bhāṇavārappamāṇena ganthenāti attho.
「震动着大地」:指以自身殊胜功德令大地发出巨响,虽为如此,却不伤害众生。由于一切诸佛皆是最极右绕的,所以先抬右脚。因足善安立,故能平稳触地。虽平稳触地,但因皮肤细滑,不为尘垢所染。「低洼处隆起」等,是诸佛获得名为「足善安立」的大人相所感得的异熟果报。「不远抬足」:即不将脚抬得过远再放下。「不极近落下」:即不于过近处落足而行。「令包括天人在内的世间欢喜」:指使包括天神在内的世间众生心生喜悦。「以四足行走」:即是四足行走者的意思。显示巴利原文
Kampayanto vasundharanti attano guṇavisesehi pathavīkammaṃ unnādento, evaṃbhūtopi aheṭhayanto pāṇāni. Sabbapadakkhiṇattā buddhānaṃ dakkhiṇaṃ paṭhamaṃ pādaṃ uddharanto. Samaṃ samphusate bhūmiṃ suppatiṭṭhitapādatāya. Yadipi bhūmiṃ samaṃ phusati, rajasā nupalippati sukhumattā chaviyā. Ninnaṭṭhānaṃ unnamatītiādi buddhānaṃ suppatiṭṭhitapādatāsaṅkhātamahāpurisalakkhaṇapaṭilābhassa nissandaphalaṃ. Nātidūre uddharatīti atidūre ṭhapetuṃ na uddharati. Naccāsanne ca nikkhipanti accāsanne ca ṭhāne anikkhipanto niyyāti. Hāsayanto sadevake loke tosento. Catūhi pādehi caratīti catucārī.
这是为了宣说佛陀的威神力而作,故名为称扬之时。当讲述佛陀的身相或功德时,不应说这是「不善说」。何以故?因诸佛世尊具足无量的功德,对于了知的人而言,赞颂佛陀的功德,正是随顺已开始的赞颂而进入,这才是恰当的。「以细布卷」:指用细布打了结后拿着。显示巴利原文
Buddhānubhāvassa pakāsanavasena gatattā vaṇṇakālo nāma esa. Sarīravaṇṇe vā guṇavaṇṇe vā kathiyamāne dukkathitanti na vattabbaṃ. Kasmā? Appamāṇavaṇṇā hi buddhā bhagavanto, buddhaguṇasaṃvaṇṇanā jānantassa yathāraddhasaṃvaṇṇanaṃyeva anupavisati. Dukūlacumbaṭakenāti ganthitvā gahitadukūlavatthena.
「象王般的行步姿态」:指脚步安放如象王。「百福相」:指由上百种福业所成就的大人相。「如同摩尼宝珠照耀」:犹如被八万四千颗宝珠围绕、极其闪耀放光的摩尼宝珠。有人说:「维度哒跋是一种宝珠。」「大娑罗树」:如同大娑罗树,或洁净挺拔的拘毗陀罗树等大树。「如红睡莲」:如同被称为红睡莲的大莲花,或盛开的莲花。显示巴利原文
Nāgavikkantacāraṇoti hatthināgasadisapadanikkhepo. Satapuññalakkhaṇoti anekasatapuññābhinibbattamahāpurisalakkhaṇo. Maṇiverocano yathāti caturāsītisahassamaṇiparivārito ativiya virocamāno vijjotamāno maṇi viya. ‘‘Verocano nāma eko maṇī’’ti keci. Mahāsālovāti mahanto sālarukkho viya, suddhaṭṭhito koviḷārādi mahārukkho viya vā. Padumo kokanado yathāti kokanadasaṅkhātaṃ mahāpadumaṃ viya, vikasamānapadumaṃ viya vā.
「如同引入天河」等:这是为了显示其杂论中他人极难做到之事,也让听闻者见到能带来究竟安乐的情形。「如同抽取地髓」:犹如运用汲水器械,从大地底层把凝乳状的地髓向上抽取。「一由旬」:即一由旬的长度。「蜜瓶」:指蜜层。显示巴利原文
Ākāsagaṅgaṃ otārento viyātiādi tassā pakiṇṇakakathāya aññesaṃ sudukkarabhāvadassanañceva suṇantānaṃ accantasukhāvahabhāvadassanañca. Pathavojaṃ ākaḍḍhanto viyāti nāḷiyantaṃ yojetvā mahāpathaviyā heṭṭhimatale pappaṭakojaṃ uddhaṃ mukhaṃ katvā ākaḍḍhanto viya. Yojanikanti yojanapamāṇaṃ. Madhubhaṇḍanti madhupaṭalaṃ.
「大」:指广大、殊胜的福德。「一切布施即是已施」:意思是,当施主布施了住所,便等于布施了一切资具。因为即使比丘游行两三个村庄乞食而一无所得地回来,进入有树荫流水的园林,沐浴后在住处躺卧片刻再起身坐下,身体就像被注入了气力。在外游行的比丘,身色光泽会被风吹日晒所损;进入住所闭门稍坐,那些不调顺的心相续便得平息,调顺的心相续便得安住,身色光泽犹如重新注入。在外游行的比丘,脚会被荆棘刺伤、被树桩撞伤,还会遭遇爬虫之类与盗贼的怖畏;进入住所闭门坐下,这些危险就都没有了。正在读诵法义的比丘获得法的喜乐,正在修习业处的比丘得到止息的安乐,因为没有外在的散乱。在外游行的比丘,身上流汗,眼睛眨动,进入坐卧处时床、椅等都看不清;坐下片刻后,眼根变得清净,仿佛被注入光泽,门、窗、床、椅等便都看得清楚了。再者,人们见到比丘住在此处,便会恭敬地以四种资具供养。因此说:『当布施了住所,便等于布施了一切布施。』至于『地居……乃至……不能』的义理,应依大善见王的本生故事来说明。母显示巴利原文
Mahantanti vipulaṃ uḷārapuññaṃ. Sabbadānaṃ dinnameva hotīti sabbameva paccayajātaṃ āvāsadāyakena dinnameva hoti. Tathā hi dve tayo gāme piṇḍāya caritvā kiñci aladdhā āgatassapi chāyūdakasampannaṃ ārāmaṃ pavisitvā nhāyitvā paṭissaye muhuttaṃ nipajjitvā uṭṭhāya nisinnassa kāye balaṃ āharitvā pakkhittaṃ viya hoti. Bahi vicarantassa ca kāye vaṇṇadhātu vātātapehi kilamati, paṭissayaṃ pavisitvā dvāraṃ pidhāya muhuttaṃ nisinnassa visabhāgasantati vūpasammati, sabhāgasantati patiṭṭhāti, vaṇṇadhātu āharitvā pakkhittā viya hoti, bahi vicarantassa ca pāde kaṇṭakā vijjhanti, khāṇu paharati, sarīsapādiparissayā ceva corabhayañca uppajjati, paṭissayaṃ pavisitvā dvāraṃ pidhāya nisinnassa pana sabbepete parissayā na honti. Sajjhāyantassa dhammapītisukhaṃ, kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikarontassa upasamasukhaṃ uppajjati bahiddhā vikkhepābhāvato. Bahi vicarantassa ca kāye sedā muccanti, akkhīni phandanti, senāsanaṃ pavisanakkhaṇe mañcapīṭhādīni na paññāyanti, muhuttaṃ nisinnassa pana akkhipasādo āharitvā pakkhitto viya hoti, dvāravātapānamañcapīṭhādīni paññāyanti. Etasmiñca āvāse vasantaṃ disvā manussā catūhi paccayehi sakkaccaṃ upaṭṭhahanti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘āvāsadānasmiñhi dinne sabbadānaṃ dinnameva hotī’’ti. Bhūmaṭṭhaka…pe… nasakkāti ayamattho mahāsudassanavatthunā (dī. ni. 2.241 ādayo) dīpetabbo. Mātukucchi asambādhova hotīti ayamattho antimabhavikānaṃ mahābodhisattānaṃ paṭisandhivasena dīpetabbo.
「冷」:指因内在四大扰动或外界气候变化而产生的寒冷。「热」:指因火而生的热恼,在森林大火等情形中可见其生起。「能遮止」:即能阻挡之意。它起到防护的作用,令身心不因冷、热这两种情况而生起病苦。因为若身体受到寒冷或酷热的逼迫,比丘便心思散乱,不能如理精进。「恶兽」:指狮子、老虎等凶猛野兽。进入有守护的住所,关上门坐下,这些危险便不存在。「爬虫」:指蜿蜒爬行的长身蛇类等,以及其他类似的生物。「蚊子」:这只是举例,牛虻等虫类也包含在此义中。「寒季」:指在寒冷季节以及连降七日大雨等情况下生起的寒冷感触。「雨」:即无论何时生起的降雨,都能被遮止,应当如此结合来理解。显示巴利原文
Sītanti ajjhattaṃ dhātukkhobhavasena vā bahiddhā utuvipariṇāmavasena vā uppajjanakasītaṃ. Uṇhanti aggisantāpaṃ, tassa ca davadāhādīsu sambhavo daṭṭhabbo. Paṭihantīti paṭihanati. Yathā tadubhayavasena kāyacittānaṃ ābādho na hanati, evaṃ karoti. Sītuṇhabbhāhate hi sarīre vikkhittacitto bhikkhu yoniso padahituṃ na sakkoti. Vāḷamigānīti sīhabyagghādivāḷamige. Guttasenāsanañhi pavisitvā dvāraṃ pidhāya nisinnassa te parissayā na honti. Sarīsapeti ye keci sarantā gacchante dīghajātike sappādike aññe ca tathārūpe. Makaseti nidassanamattametaṃ, ḍaṃsādīnaṃ eteneva saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Sisireti sītakālavasena sattāhavaddalikādivasena ca uppanne sisirasamphasse. Vuṭṭhiyoti yadā tadā uppannā vassavuṭṭhiyo paṭihanatīti yojanā.
「可怖的风与热」:风因能拔起、摧折树木等,并有带尘土与不带尘土等不同种类,故为可怖;热指夏季酷热之时生起的、令人畏惧的烈日之热。「被遮止」:即被阻挡、消除。「为了庇护」:为使心从种种所缘中抽离,乐于安住于远离的寂静。「为了安乐」:由于前述那些危险皆不存在,为令安住轻安。「为了禅那」:在三十八种所缘中,将心系于任一所缘,通过令心等持而修定。「为了观」:为以无常等行相观察诸行。显示巴利原文
Vātātapo ghoroti rukkhagacchādīnaṃ ubbahanabhañjanādivasena pavattiyā ghoro sarajaarajādibhedo vāto ceva gimhapariḷāhasamayesu uppattiyā ghoro sūriyātapo ca. Paṭihaññatīti paṭibāhīyati. Leṇatthanti nānārammaṇato cittaṃ nivattitvā paṭisallāṇārāmatthaṃ. Sukhatthanti vuttaparissayābhāvena phāsuvihāratthaṃ. Jhāyitunti aṭṭhatiṃsāya ārammaṇesu yattha katthaci cittaṃ upanibandhitvā samādahanavasena jhāyituṃ. Vipassitunti aniccādivasena saṅkhāre sammasituṃ.
“Vihāreti”指依止住处而住。“Kārayeti kārāpeyya”意为令建造、促成。“Rammeti manorame”意为使心欣悦、愉悦。“Vāsayettha bahussuteti”是说:建造住处后,应令多闻、持戒、具善法者居住于此。而让他们居住时,不应使这些多闻者因资具而生疲惫。如是,应以正直、具胜解、信受业果与三宝功德的清净喜悦之心,布施饮食、衣物、坐卧具等给他们。现在为了说明在家与出家者相互资助,而说了“te tassā”这首偈颂。其中,“te”指多闻者,“tassā”指优婆塞。“Dhammaṃ desentīti”意为开示能根除一切轮回之苦、导向出离的法。“Yaṃ so dhammaṃ idhaññāyāti”:此人于此教法中,依正行而了知此法,证得最上道果,成为无漏而般涅槃。显示巴利原文
Vihāreti paṭissaye. Kārayeti kārāpeyya. Rammeti manorame. Vāsayettha bahussuteti kāretvā pana ettha vihāresu bahussute sīlavante kalyāṇadhamme nivāseyya. Te nivāsento pana tesaṃ bahussutānaṃ yathā paccayehi kilamatho na hoti. Evaṃ annañca pānañca vatthasenāsanāni ca dadeyya ujubhūtesu ajjhāsayasampannesu kammaphalānaṃ ratanattayaguṇānañca saddahanena vippasannena cetasā. Idāni gahaṭṭhapabbajitānaṃ aññamaññūpakārataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘te tassā’’ti gāthamāha. Tattha teti bahussutā. Tassāti upāsakassa. Dhammaṃ desentīti sakalavaṭṭadukkhapanūdanaṃ niyyānikaṃ dhammaṃ kathenti. Yaṃ so dhammaṃ idhaññāyāti so puggalo yaṃ saddhammaṃ imasmiṃ sāsane sammāpaṭipajjanena jānitvā aggamaggādhigamena anāsavo hutvā parinibbāyati.
“令居住”指布施住所。“利益”指果报。由于以供养和恭敬,初夜便过去了;又因导师说法,中夜也几乎过完,所以经文中说“一夜已过多时”,因此说“超过半个夜分”。之所以没有收入结集,是因为内容极其广博。对诸佛而言,就连饭后的随喜祝谢若稍加展开,也会成为长篇或中篇的量。为什么呢?因为佛陀齿龈饱满,舌薄,有分心极为短暂,说法时无有急促、无有延展,无有散乱心,一切知智圆满现前,无碍解没有丝毫减损。显示巴利原文
Āvāseti āvāsadāne. Ānisaṃsoti udrayo. Pūjāsakkāravasena paṭhamayāmo khepito, satthu dhammadesanāya appāvaseso majjhimayāmo gatoti pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘bahudeva ratti’’nti vuttanti āha ‘‘atirekataraṃ diyaḍḍhayāma’’nti. Saṅgahaṃ nārohati vipulavitthārabhāvato. Buddhānañhi bhattānumodanāpi thokaṃ vaḍḍhetvā vuccamānā dīghamajjhimapamāṇāpi hoti. Tathā hi suphusitaṃ dantāvaraṇaṃ, jivhā tanukā, bhavaṅgaparivāso paritto, natthi vegāyitaṃ, natthi vitthāyitaṃ, natthi abyāvaṭamano, sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ samupabyūḷhaṃ, aparikkhayā paṭisambhidā.
“开示后”等:开示以后,即作了与布施住所相关的如法之论。接着,“大王,这是戒,这是定,这是慧”,向他们正确地指出戒等功德后,如同亲手握着一般,使其亲见明了。“劝令受持后”:即“应如此受持戒,依戒安立后应如此修习定慧”,令他们如此正确地领受戒等功德。“激励后”:使其所受持的戒变得极清净,修习止观时能善加净化,层层增进而带来殊胜,如此激励后,通过审察令其清净。“喜悦后”:以依教安住于戒等功德,对于现已获得的功德利益,以及未来将得的殊胜果报,令心喜悦,通过获得安稳而善加满足。这些词的意思应当如此理解。释迦族的王族们大多在听受世尊说法后,于教法中尝得法味、获得安稳立足。显示巴利原文
Sandassetvātiādīsu sandassetvā āvāsadānapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ dhammiṃ kathaṃ katvā. Tato paraṃ, mahārāja, itipi sīlaṃ, itipi samādhi, itipi paññāti sīlādiguṇe tesaṃ sammā dassetvā hatthena gahetvā viya paccakkhato pakāsetvā. Samādapetvāti evaṃ sīlaṃ samādātabbaṃ, sīle patiṭṭhitena evaṃ samādhipaññā bhāvetabbāti yathā te sīlādiguṇe sammā ādiyanti, tathā gaṇhāpetvā. Samuttejetvāti yathāsamādinnaṃ sīlaṃ suvisuddhaṃ hoti, samathavipassanā ca bhāviyamānā yathā suṭṭhu visodhitā uparūpari visesāvahā honti, evaṃ samuttejetvā nisāmanavasena vodāpetvā. Sampahaṃsetvāti yathānusiṭṭhaṃ ṭhitasīlādiguṇehi sampati paṭiladdhaguṇānisaṃsehi ceva upariladdhabbaphalavisesehi ca cittaṃ sampahaṃsetvā laddhassāsavasena suṭṭhu tosetvā. Evametesaṃ padānaṃ attho veditabbo. Sakyarājāno yebhuyyena bhagavato dhammadesanāya sāsane laddhassādā laddhappatiṭṭhā ca.
由于前缀一词多义,前缀abhi-有时也与ati-同义,所以说“abhikkantā”即是“atikkantā”(已过去、已超越)。显示巴利原文
Upasaggasaddānaṃ anekatthattā abhi-saddo ati-saddena samānatthopi hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘abhikkantāti atikkantā’’ti.
对于“在那里据说”等内容,有论师认为:即使被系缚,也不会生起。因此他说“这是没有根据的”等。“身轻快、心轻快等生起”这句话,是说明身心发生变异的原因,因为当轻快等生起时,借由获得无上的听闻,便能证得应知的义味与法悦。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Tatra kirātiādi kecivādoti baddhopi na hoti. Tenāha ‘‘akāraṇameta’’ntiādi. Kāyacittalahutādayo uppajjantīti idaṃ kāyikacetasikaaññathābhāvassa kāraṇavacanaṃ, lahutādiuppanne savanānuttariyapaṭilābhena laddhabbadhammatthavedasamadhigamato. Vuttañhetaṃ –
“贤友,当比丘的导师或某位值得尊敬的同梵行者宣说正法时,他便于那个法中获得了义之通达、法之通达,以及法随顺的喜悦”等(《长部》3.322,355;《增支部》5.26)显示巴利原文
‘‘Yathā , yathāvuso, bhikkhuno satthā vā dhammaṃ deseti aññataro vā garuṭṭhāniko sabrahmacārī, tathā tathā so tasmiṃ dhamme labhati atthavedaṃ, labhati dhammavedaṃ, labhati dhammūpasaṃhitaṃ pāmojja’’ntiādi (dī. ni. 3.322, 355; a. ni. 5.26).
背风生起,是由于所执受的身体具有如此性质,也由于诸行无常,因而伴随苦。“或者这是没有根据的”——他是依某种用意而说,为了阐明这一用意,才说了“能够”等。他能够单跏趺而坐,如同在竹林村时那样。“在这有限的处所”应理解为“在如此有限的地方成就了立足处”。而那个“确实”是指将出起之想安置于心中。当他听着法谈时,是出于对法的恭敬。显示巴利原文
Piṭṭhivāto uppajji upādinnasarīrassa tathārūpattā saṅkhārānañca aniccatāya dukkhānubandhattā. Akāraṇaṃ vā etanti yenādhippāyena vuttaṃ, tameva adhippāyaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘pahotī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ekapallaṅkena nisīdituṃ pahoti yathā taṃ veluvagāmake. Ettake ṭhāneti ettake ṭhāne ṭhānaṃ nipphannanti yojanā. Tañca khoti vuṭṭhānasaññaṃ citte ṭhapanaṃ. Dhammakathaṃ suṇamāno dhammagāravena.
「漏泄的」:指处于漏泄的状态,即由于贪欲等烦恼所致。「漏泄者的原因」:指造成漏泄状态的原因。「以烦恼之胜解」:指以烦恼的势力、以悸动的势力。「如同熄灭」:指如同寂静下来一般。「无漏泄」:指那些远离了悸动状态的。显示巴利原文
Avassutassāti avassutabhāvassa rāgādivasena. Avassutassa kāraṇanti tintabhāvakāraṇaṃ. Kilesādhimuccanenāti kilesavasena paripphanditavasena. Nibbāpanaṃ viyāti vūpasamo viya. Nibbisevanānanti paripphandanarahitānaṃ.
第七、《苦法经》注释显示巴利原文
7. Dukkhadhammasuttavaṇṇanā
244 「苦法」:指导致苦的原因。因此他说“具有生起苦之法”等。为说明“何为苦?何为苦法?”这两者,故说“在五种(蕴)中”。那些即指五蕴。由于它们是苦生起之因,故称为“具有生起苦之法的”。那个“它的”(assa)一词,即指“由此”,此处是在表示原因的意义上使用属格。「于欲」:指所缘欲和烦恼欲。又,另一个“它的”一词,同样是在所属的意义上使用属格。「行」:指心的游走。「住」:指依靠五门转起的游走与安住。也有人说“同一住处”。因此正是说“跟随而行的”一语。「跟随而行」:指从心路过程生起开始,直到第三速行刹那,不断地追随、跟随而行。说到“跃入等”,此中“等”字也包含了通过耕作、守牛等方式去寻求诸欲所带来的苦。显示巴利原文
244.Dukkhadhammānanti dukkhakāraṇānaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘dukkhasambhavadhammāna’’ntiādi. Tattha kiṃ dukkhaṃ, kā dukkhadhammāti tadubhayaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘pañcasu hī’’ti vuttaṃ. Teti pañcakkhandhā. Dukkhasambhavadhammattāti dukkhuppattikāraṇattā. Assāti tena. Karaṇe hetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Kāmeti vatthukāme kilesakāme ca. Puna assāti sāmiatthe eva sāmivacanaṃ. Cāranti cittācāraṃ. Vihāranti pañcadvārappavatticāravihāraṃ. ‘‘Ekaṭṭhā’’ti ca vadanti. Teneva hi ‘‘anubandhitvā carantaṃ’’icceva vuttaṃ. Anubandhitvāti ca vīthicittappavattito paṭṭhāya yāva tatiyajavanavārā anu anu bandhitvā. Pakkhandanādīti ādi-saddena kasigorakkhādivasenapi kāmānaṃ pariyesanadukkhaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
“Dāyati”意为“给予”,此处指森林。因此他说“密林”(aṭavi)。“荆棘密布的洞穴”:指如同内室一般的密林。所谓名词,是期待有动词与之相配的,故此处以“他刺穿”(vijjhi)这一未说出的动词,补足动词之义。显示巴利原文
Dāyatīti dāyo, vanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘aṭavi’’nti. Kaṇṭakagabbhanti ovarakasadisaṃ vanaṃ. Nāmapadaṃ nāma kiriyāpadāpekkhanti ‘‘vijjhī’’ti vacanasesena kiriyāpadaṃ gaṇhāti.
“迟钝状态”是指已生起的烦恼的停驻,因此他说“刚刚生起的”等。“依于那个”是指依于念。所谓“某些烦恼”,是就十四种心作用中,仅在速行作用时生起的心之烦恼而说的。它们由于被剥夺了继续转起的机会,于是便被镇伏了,因此他说:“不能安住”。之所以说“在眼门”,是因为经文中首先提到了眼门,以此类推,其余诸门也同样被纳入。当贪欲等烦恼生起时,是在第一个速行心。当忘失了正念,而能了知“烦恼已在我中生起”时,便通过如理作意的忆念获得了对治,因此他说:“这并非寻常”。“回转”是指不如理地回转。“在转向等中”是指就在那种不如理的转向等心所生起时,由于获得了可意的所缘,因缘条件具足,烦恼便达到了适宜转起的状态。“逆转”是指即使在第二个速行心,也逆转了烦恼的生起。然而,他如何能够做到这一点呢?他说:“对于已经开始精勤修习观的人”等。“依于修习与审察”是指瑜伽行者安立于修习与审察之中。这就是它的功德利益:那些即使因为获得外缘而得到了生起机会的烦恼,也由于先前所修习的观智的威力而被镇伏,就这样被一再镇伏。显示巴利原文
Dandhāyitattaṃ uppannakilesānaṃ avaṭṭhānaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘uppannamattāyā’’tiādi. Tāyāti satiyā. Kāci kilesāti cuddasavidhe cittassa kicce javanakicce eva cittakilesānaṃ uppattiṃ katvā tathā vuttaṃ. Niggahitāva honti pavattituṃ appadānavasena. Tenāha ‘‘na saṇṭhātuṃ sakkontī’’ti. Cakkhudvārasminti pāḷiyaṃ tassa paṭhamaṃ gahitatāya vuttaṃ, tena nayena sesadvārānipi gahitāneva honti. Rāgādīsu uppannesu paṭhamajavanavāre. Satisammosena ‘‘kilesā me uppannā’’ti ñatvā tathā paccāmāsasatiyā labbhanato. Tenāha – ‘‘anacchariyaṃ ceta’’nti. Āvaṭṭetvāti ayoniso āvaṭṭetvā. Āvajjanādīsūti tato eva ayoniso āvajjanādīsu uppannesu iṭṭhārammaṇassa laddhattā paccayasiddhiyā sampattaṃ pavattanārahaṃ. Nivattetvāti dutiyajavanavārepi kilesuppattiṃ nivattetvā. Kathaṃ panassa evaṃ laddhuṃ sakkāti āha ‘‘āraddhavipassakānaṃ hī’’tiādi. Bhāvanāpaṭisaṅkhāneti bhāvanāyaṃ paṭisaṅkhāne ca yogino patiṭṭhitabhāvo. Tassa ayamānisaṃso – yaṃ paccayalābhena uppajjituṃ laddhokāsāpi kilesā pubbe pavattabhāvanānubhāvena vikkhambhitā tathā tathā niggahitā eva hutvā nivattanti, kusalā dhammāva laddhokāsā uparūpari vaḍḍhanti.
“Abhihaṭṭhuṃ”意为“带来之后”。“Anudahanti”意为“像是在燃烧”。“Anusenti”此处也是同样的解释方法。“Anāvaṭṭante”意指处于不退转的沙门共性中,即不退转的沙门状态。因为这里没有阐明道与果的证得,所以只阐明了观的力量。显示巴利原文
Abhihaṭṭhunti abhiharitvā. Anudahantīti anudahantā viya honti. Anusentīti etthāpi eseva nayo. Anāvaṭṭanteti anivattante sāmaññatoti adhippāyo. Vipassanābalameva dīpitaṃ maggaphalādhigamassa ajotitattā.
8. 《紧叔迦树譬喻经》注疏显示巴利原文
8. Kiṃsukopamasuttavaṇṇanā
245 245. 对于四圣谛,通过遍知等通达方式而有种种的见,这是依作用而说为种种见,“见”是初道的同义词。这初道的见,是因为在上道中修习的次第已成惯例,而初道是首先见到涅槃。因此说“初道”等。有人不理解如上所说的无误含义,会认为所谓的“如实知见”是依所缘的造作而有过度推断,为遮止此,于是说“种姓”等。这里不称为见,举“见国王”为喻。其实四道都是见,依所说的含义;但修习的次第是指上面三道依初道的方法,以修习的方式转起。在这里,“见清净”即指见到清净的涅槃。拥有触处为业处者,称为“触处业处者”。这一道理也适用于其余各处。显示巴利原文
245. Catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ pariññābhisamayādivasena vividhadassananti kiccavasena nānādassanaṃ hotīti vuttaṃ, ‘‘dassananti paṭhamamaggassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti . Tayidaṃ uparimaggesu bhāvanāpariyāyassa niruḷhattā paṭhamamaggassa paṭhamaṃ nibbānadassanato. Tenāha ‘‘paṭhamamaggo hī’’tiādi . Koci yathāvuttaṃ aviparītaṃ atthaṃ ajānanto ñāṇadassanaṃ nāma ārammaṇakaraṇassa vasena atippasaṅgaṃ āsaṅkeyyāti taṃ nivattetuṃ ‘‘gotrabhū panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Na dassananti vuccatīti ettha rājadassanaṃ udāharanti. Cattāropi maggā dassanameva yathāvuttenatthena, bhāvanāpariyāyo pana upari tiṇṇaṃ maggānaṃ paṭhamamaggaupāyassa bhāvanākārena pavattanato. Dassanaṃ visuddhi etthāti dassanavisuddhikaṃ, nibbānaṃ. Phassāyatanaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ assa atthīti phassāyatanakammaṭṭhāniko. Esa nayo sesesupi padesu.
“Padesasaṅkhāresu”意为“于部分诸行中”。他们说:以最低的限度而言,仅见地界等法时,便成立了“色的执取”;仅见眼识等及其相应之法时,便成立了“无色的执取”。显示巴利原文
Padesasaṅkhāresūti saṅkhārekadesesu. Heṭṭhimaparicchedena pathaviādike dhammamatte diṭṭhe rūpapariggaho, cakkhuviññāṇādike taṃsahagatadhammamatte diṭṭhe arūpapariggaho ca sijjhatīti vadanti.
“已证得道者即说”的意思是:他由哪个入口而专注于观,就为他说那个入口。而“这个”,是指那位询问业处的比丘。“这些”,是那些修习触处业处与五蕴业处者所说的话。在说出“相互不一致”之后,为了阐明此义,接着说“第一种”等。因为五蕴的解脱之行尚不成立,所以说“无余”。同样地:如同对那位触处业处的修行者的询问,对那位五蕴业处的修行者也作了同样的询问。显示巴利原文
Adhigatamaggameva kathesīti yena mukhena vipassanābhinivesaṃ akāsi, tamevassa mukhaṃ kathesi. Ayaṃ panāti kammaṭṭhānaṃ pucchanto bhikkhu. Imesanti phassāyatanakammaṭṭhānikapañcakkhandhakammaṭṭhānikānaṃ vacanaṃ. ‘‘Aññamaññaṃ na sametī’’ti vatvā tamevatthaṃ pākaṭaṃ karoti ‘‘paṭhamenā’’tiādinā. Pañcakkhandhavimuttassa saṅkhārassa abhāvā ‘‘nippadesesū’’ti vuttaṃ. Tathevāti yatheva phassāyatanakammaṭṭhānikaṃ, tatheva taṃ pañcakkhandhakammaṭṭhānikaṃ pucchitvā.
“平稳地产生的界”指味等身界平稳地产生,而非安住于不平衡的状态。因此他说:“身体健适,体力充足”。“过去的行”等,是依于观照的投入方式而说。对诸行的“遍察”在任何时候都应当希求。“行境之地”是指行境,即活动的领域。显示巴利原文
Samappavattā dhātuyoti rasādayo sarīradhātuyo samappavattā, na visamākārasaṇṭhitā ahesuṃ. Tenāha ‘‘kallasarīraṃ balappatta’’nti. ‘‘Atītā saṅkhārā’’tiādi vipassanābhinivesavasena vuttaṃ. Sammasanaṃ sabbatthakameva icchitabbaṃ. Cāribhūminti gocaraṭṭhānaṃ.
“造作者的状态”即致力修习的状态。“黄疸病人”指患有黄疸病的人。“阿利咤”指药线。“制作了药”指进行了药物的施用。“我将作”即我将制作药物。“如烧柱”意思是如同被焚烧过的柱子,因为它被碱液网缠缚,又被嫩芽簇覆盖。显示巴利原文
Kārakabhāvanti bhāvanānuyuñjanabhāvaṃ. Paṇḍurogapurisoti paṇḍurogī puriso. Ariṭṭhanti suttaṃ. Bhesajjaṃ katvāti bhesajjapayogaṃ katvā. Karissāmīti bhesajjaṃ karissāmi. Jhāmathuṇo viyāti daḍḍhathuṇo viya khārakajālanaddhattā taruṇamakulasantānasañchannattā.
“南门村”指南门附近的村庄。“红色者”即红色的。“垂布条状”指仿佛长出了垂挂的破布条。“已取嫩芽”指已经摘去果实的嫩芽。“浓荫”即茂密的树荫。由于那棵树的枝条并不稀疏,叶片繁茂,相互交错而住立,所以它的树荫也是如此,因此说“浓荫,即相互交错的树荫”,意思是稠密的树荫。“此处”等是与譬喻的联结。显示巴利原文
Dakkhiṇadvāragāmeti dakkhiṇadvārasamīpe gāme. Lohitakoti lohitavaṇṇo. Ocirakajātoti jātaolambamānacirako viya. Ādinnasipāṭikoti gahitaphalapotako. Sandacchāyoti bahalacchāyo. Yasmā tassa rukkhassa sākhā aviraḷā ghanappattā aññamaññaṃ saṃsanditvā ṭhitā, tasmā chāyāpissa tādisīti vuttaṃ ‘‘sandacchāyo nāma saṃsanditvā ṭhitacchāyo’’ti, ghanacchāyoti attho. Tatthātiādi upamāsaṃsandanaṃ.
“以任何方式已倾向”指那些以六触处等为门径,依各自修观之专注方式而修毗婆舍那,并已倾向涅槃的人。由于遍知时等成就,其观极为清净。“以那种种方式”即依自己所倾向的方式。如今,为了结合譬喻来显示那各种方式,便开始了“正如……”等开示。这些容易理解。显示巴利原文
Yenayenākārena adhimuttānanti chaphassāyatanādimukhena yena yena vipassanābhinivesena vipassantānaṃ nibbānañca adhimuttānaṃ. Suṭṭhu visuddhaṃ pariññātisamayādisiddhiyā. Tena tenevākārenāti attanādhimuttākārena. Idāni taṃ taṃ ākāraṃ upamāya saddhiṃ yojetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Taṃ suviññeyyameva.
“这”即指那城市譬喻。“已善标列”意为:若由紧祝迦譬喻所阐明的义理类别已妥善标列。“这位比丘”即指该比丘。“为说法义”是为了增长依所标列之义而获得殊胜者的境界。“即彼义理”指那称为见清净的义理。盗贼的恐怖不会生起,因中部地区的王国境内安宁澄净。“三男子肘量高”:其高度如三名男子之高,以种种壁饰等庄严,柱子上方更有花鬘等各种工巧庄严的弓形装饰,令人赏心悦目,因此说“为了庄严城市”。出于建立城门坚固性而应被安置,故说“也有防贼之用”。他具备名为聪慧的智,能了知:“这些是常住的,这些是外来的;其中,通过这些人对城市与城主有意义,通过这些则可能产生无义。”他具备名为敏捷的巧善,能防范未知的危害。“即所谓处生智”:在种种有益的事务中,当下即能生起的辨才,即此所谓处生智。显示巴利原文
Idanti nagaropamaṃ. Taṃ sallakkhitanti kiṃsukopamadīpitaṃ atthajātaṃ sace sallakkhitaṃ. Assa bhikkhuno. Dhammadesanatthanti yathāsallakkhitassa atthassa vasena laddhavisesassa upabrūhanāya. Tassevatthassāti tassa dassanavisuddhisaṅkhātassa atthassa. Corāsaṅkā na honti majjhimadesarajjassa pasannabhāvato. Tipurisubbedhānīti ubbedhena tipurisappamāṇāni nānābhittivicittāni thambhānaṃ upari vividhamālākammādivicittadhanurākāralakkhitāni manoramāni. Tenāha ‘‘nagarassa alaṅkārattha’’nti. Nagaradvārassa thirabhāvāpādanavasena ṭhapetabbattā vuttaṃ ‘‘coranivāraṇatthānipi hontiyevā’’ti. Piṭṭhasaṅghātassāti dvārabāhassa. ‘‘Ime āvāsikā, ime āgantukā, tatthāpi ca imehi nagarassa nagarasāmikassa ca attho. Imesaṃ vasena anattho siyā’’ti jānanañāṇasaṅkhātena paṇḍiccena samannāgato. Aññātanivāraṇe paṭubhāvasaṅkhātena veyyattiyena samannāgato. Ṭhānuppattikapaññāsaṅkhātāyāti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ atthakicce taṅkhaṇuppajjanakapaṭibhānasaṅkhātāya.
被国王委任、派遣者,即是“王所委任者”,指安插在各处办理国王应办事务之人。“仅数日”:仅数日间,因不履行职务,他的职位便动摇了,故而说“剥夺了一切判决处等(职位)”后。显示巴利原文
Raññā āyutto niyojito rājāyutto, tattha tattha rañño kātabbakicce ṭhapitapuriso. Katipāheyevāti katipayadivaseyeva akiccakaraṇena tassa ṭhānaṃ vibbhamo jātoti katvā vuttaṃ – ‘‘sabbāni vinicchayaṭṭhānādīni hāretvā’’ti.
“砍他的头”(sīsamassa chindāhi):意指砍除那为首的、处于最高肢体位置的、他于彼处所行的国王事务。若按通常字面义理解,则成了命令杀生。因为转轮王不会如此命令,且亦禁止他人如此做。或者,“砍”(chindāhi)可作如是解:依我之令,你示现如欲砍其头之状;如此,他因抗拒此教诫而遭受惩罚,将会沉没;且后文中的行持正由此而来。“在那里”(tattha):在那座边境城市之中。显示巴利原文
Sīsamassa chindāhīti sīsabhūtaṃ uttamaṅgaṭṭhāniyaṃ tattha tassa rājakiccaṃ chindāti attho. Aññathā tassa pākatike atthe gayhamāne pāṇātipāto āṇatto nāma siyā. Na hi cakkavattirājā tādisaṃ āṇāpeti, aññesampi tato nivārakattā. Atha vā chindāhīti mama āṇāya assa sīsaṃ chindanto viya attānaṃ dassehi, evaṃ so tatthovādapaṭikarattapatto odameyyāti, tathā ceva upari paṭipatti āgatā. Tatthāti etasmiṃ paccantimanagare.
「由生起」(uppannena):即于止的业处所生起的心。显示巴利原文
Uppannenāti samathakammaṭṭhāne uppannena.
「即是他的」(tasseva):应关联理解:即指那称为「诸门」(dvārāni)的有身之城。所说的「速疾的使者双」(sīghaṃ dūtayuga)也依此关联而说。由于在心所依处色中间,它处于十字路口的位置,因此经文说「作为心所依处所依的大种」。若是如此,按理只应取所依处色本身,为何此处不取处色,却要说大种?故而他说「处色的……」等等。「如同」(yādisa):指就正见等而言,如同前面已出现的观道那样。接着指出:「此道亦具八支,故亦是如此」,随后便将圣道称为「如所来之道」(yathāgatamagga)。「这是此时此处的」(idaṃ tāvettha):在这部经中,为解说教法义理而引用的上述譬喻,如今进行这样的对应结合。显示巴利原文
Tassevāti sakkāyasaṅkhātassa nagarassa ‘‘dvārānī’’ti vuttānīti ānetvā sambandho. ‘‘Sīghaṃ dūtayuga’’nti vuttāti yojanā. Hadayavatthurūpassa majjhe siṅghāṭakabhāvena gahitattā ‘‘hadayavatthussa nissayabhūtānaṃ mahābhūtāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Yadi evaṃ vatthurūpameva gahetabbaṃ, tadevettha aggahetvā kasmā mahābhūtaggahaṇanti āha ‘‘vatthurūpassa hī’’tiādi. Yādisoti sammādiṭṭhiādīnaṃ vasena yādiso eva pubbe āgatavipassanāmaggo. ‘‘Ayampi aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgatattā tādiso evā’’ti vatvā ariyamaggo ‘‘yathāgatamaggo’’ti vutto. Idaṃ tāvetthāti ettha etasmiṃ sutte dhammadesanatthaṃ ābhatāya yathāvuttaupamāya idaṃ saṃsandanaṃ.
「这是结合」(idaṃ saṃsandana):现在将要说明的,是譬喻与教义之间的对应。城主譬喻是为了显示依观察五蕴而达到见清净的漏尽者而引用的。十字路口譬喻则是为了显示依观察四大而达到见清净的漏尽者而引用的。这是二者之间的关联配合。在说了「仅说了四谛」之后,为了进一步择定和显示这些谛,所以说「若用完整的……」等等。在此,城市的种种资具代表六门等,因此以它们来比喻六触处等。然而,这些都属于苦谛的范畴,所以说「通过城市的资具,只说明了苦谛」。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ saṃsandananti idāni vakkhamānaṃ upamāya saṃsandanaṃ. Nagarasāmiupamā pañcakkhandhavasena dassanavisuddhipattaṃ khīṇāsavaṃ dassetuṃ ābhatā. Siṅghāṭakūpamā catumahābhūtavasena dassanavisuddhipattaṃ khīṇāsavaṃ dassetuṃ ābhatāti yojanā. ‘‘Catusaccameva kathita’’nti vatvā tāni saccāni niddhāretvā dassetuṃ ‘‘sakalenapi hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Idha nagarasambhāro chadvārādayo. Tena hi chaphassāyatanādayo upamitā. Te pana dukkhasaccapariyāpannāti vuttaṃ ‘‘nagarasambhārena dukkhasaccameva kathita’’nti.
9. 琴喻经注释显示巴利原文
9. Vīṇopamasuttavaṇṇanā
246 「比丘或比丘尼」(bhikkhussa vā bhikkhuniyā vā):经中虽仅提及此二众,但对于其余各类弟子,以及天、人等一切众生而言,这同样是一种共通的法的摄受。为了以譬喻来显明此义,因此开始说「如同所谓的……」等等。「施与者」(yajanto):即布施之人。「应得的」(vinditabbo):即可获得、应被证得之义。显示巴利原文
246.Bhikkhussa vā bhikkhuniyā vāti kāmaṃ pāḷiyaṃ parisādvayameva gahitaṃ, sesaparisānaṃ pana tadaññesampi devamanussānanti sabbasādhāraṇovāyaṃ dhammasaṅgahoti imamatthaṃ upamāpubbakaṃ katvā dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā nāmā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Yajantoti dadanto. Vinditabboti laddhabbo, adhigantabboti attho.
「欲」(chando):指渴爱之欲。因此说:「微弱的渴爱,不能令心染着。」「先前生起」(pubbuppattikā):指对于同一所缘,最初生起的那个。因其未被反复修习,故力量微劣。「彼」(so):即此欲。不能令心染着,是因为它已获得修习而得到了支持。嗔(dosa),则名为心的污染。「这些」(tāni):指执杖等行为。「以此为根」(taṃmūlakā):意思是,以贪为根的,如谄、诳、慢、过慢等;以嗔为根的,如忿、恨、覆、悭、嫉、固执、好诤等;以痴为根的,如无惭、无愧、昏沉睡眠、疑、掉举、非理作意等——这些染污法,都因为以那些为根而被包含在内。然而,一切染污法都摄于十二种不善心的生起之中,为显示它们在此处也被包含,故说「欲即贪等」(chando rāgoti vā)。显示巴利原文
Chandoti taṇhāchando. Tenāha – ‘‘dubbalataṇhā so rañjetuṃ na sakkotī’’ti. Pubbuppattikā ekasmiṃ ārammaṇe paṭhamaṃ uppannā. Sā hi anāsevanattā mandā. Soti chando. Rañjetuṃ na sakkoti laddhāsevanattā. Doso nāma cittadūsanattā. Tānīti daṇḍādānādīni. Tammūlakāti lobhamūlakā tāva māyāsāṭheyyamānātimānadiṭṭhicāpalādayo, dosamūlakā upanāhamakkhapalāsaissāmacchariyathambhasārambhādayo, mohamūlakā ahirika-anottappa-thinamiddhavicikicchuddhacca-viparītamanasikārādayo, saṃkilesadhammā gahitāva honti taṃmūlakattā. Yasmā pana sabbepi saṃkilesadhammā dvādasākusalacittuppādapariyāpannā eva, tasmā tesampettha gahitabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘chando rāgoti vā’’ti vuttaṃ.
因应被畏惧,故说「有怖畏」(sabhayo)。因是可怖的,故说「有恐惧」(sappaṭibhayo)。因能镇伏善法,故说「有刺」(sakaṇṭako)。因善法与无过失法难以进入,故说「有稠林」(sagahano)。因不给予有之成就与涅槃,故说「邪道」(ummaggo)。因是通往恶趣之道,故说「恶道」(kummaggo)。「运作」(iriyanā):指转起、行道。因通往恶趣,烦恼本身就是「烦恼道」。既不能到达有之成就,何况前往涅槃——这是其含义。显示巴利原文
Bhāyitabbaṭṭhena sabhayo. Bheravaṭṭhena sappaṭibhayo. Kusalapakkhassa vikkhambhanaṭṭhena sakaṇṭako. Kusalaanavajjadhammehi duravagāhaṭṭhena sagahano. Bhavasampattibhavanibbānānaṃ appadānabhāvato ummaggo. Duggatigāmimaggattā kummaggo. Iriyanāti vattanā paṭipajjanā. Duggatigāmitāya kileso eva kilesamaggo. Na sakkā sampattibhavaṃ gantuṃ kuto nibbānagamananti adhippāyo.
“以不净作意等”:“等”字应知也包含了无常作意等。心便转回,有贪之心便不生起,因为它已被对治的作意所去除。“于中舍所缘”:指处于无智舍位的所缘。“指示……遍问……亲近师长而作意”:以令他人指示的方式为“指示”,以令他人遍问的方式为“遍问”,以亲近师长而住的方式为“亲近师长”,指转向这些者。心:通过甚深智行、观察、亲近有智者,成就了对这些的倾向,无智之心便转回。显示巴利原文
Asubhāvajjanādīhīti ādi-saddena aniccamanasikārādīnampi saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Cittaṃ nivattati sarāgacittaṃ na uppajjati paṭipakkhamanasikārena vinoditattā. Majjhattārammaṇeti aññāṇupekkhaṭṭhāniye ārammaṇe. Uddesa…pe… āvajjantassāti uddisāpanavasena uddesaṃ, paripucchāpanavasena paripucchaṃ, garūnaṃ santike vasanavasena garuvāsaṃ āvajjantassa. Cittanti gambhīrañāṇacariya-paccavekkhaṇa-paññavanta-puggalasevanavasena tadadhimuttisiddhiyā aññāṇacittaṃ nivattati.
正如说“福德是应供养、有果报的”,也说“如是此福德增长”(《长部》3.80),同样,由于从谷物生起,故称为“谷物”(kiṭṭha)。因此说:“‘谷物’是指在谷物处所生起的农作物。”显示巴利原文
Yathā ‘‘pujjabhavaphalaṃ puñña’’nti vuttaṃ ‘‘evamidaṃ puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.80), evaṃ kiṭṭhasambhavattā ‘‘kiṭṭha’’nti vuttanti āha ‘‘kiṭṭhanti kiṭṭhaṭṭhāne uppannasassa’’nti.
“Ghaṭā”:这里意指一对角,因此说“在两角之间”。他们说“Ghaṭā”是对牛等动物两角之间区域的通称。“鼻绳”:指鼻绳穿入之处。显示巴利原文
Ghaṭāti siṅgayugaṃ idhādhippetanti āha ‘‘dvinnaṃ siṅgānaṃ antare’’ti. Ghaṭāti goṇādīnaṃ siṅgantaraṭṭhassa samaññāti vadanti. Nāsārajjuketi nāsārajjupātaṭṭhāne.
“调伏”:即令心从种种所缘中得以制止。“它”:指心。“那经是我善说的”:“那时”即指那时这位比丘的。“于所缘”:指在业处所缘上。显示巴利原文
Dameti puthuttārammaṇato nivāreti. Nanti cittaṃ. Yaṃ suttaṃ subhāsitaṃ mayā. Tadassāti tadā assa bhikkhuno. Ārammaṇeti kammaṭṭhānārammaṇe.
“善调伏的”:通过做到不再追随而得到调伏。“善驱逐的”:通过彻底地远远舍弃而得到调伏,而这样的状态即名为“它所驱逐的”,故如此说。“内行境”:行境成为内在的。由于业处所缘已远离外在的色等所缘,故称其为“内”。“止的保护”:止是它的保护。正如根律仪戒成为止的保护那样,经中已如此说,这就是它的含义。正如根律仪戒是止的缘,同样地,止也是它的缘。显示巴利原文
Sudujitanti nibbisevanabhāvakaraṇena jitaṃ. Sutajjitanti suṭṭhu dūrakaraṇena jitaṃ, tathābhūtañca tajjitaṃ nāma hotīti tathā vuttaṃ. Gocarajjhattanti ajjhattabhūto gocaro. Kammaṭṭhānārammaṇañhi bahiddhārūpādiārammaṇavidhuratāya ajjhattanti vuccati. Samatho anurakkhaṇaṃ etassāti samathānurakkhaṇaṃ. Yathā indriyasaṃvarasīlaṃ samathānurakkhaṇaṃ hoti, tathā kathitanti attho. Yathā hi indriyasaṃvarasīlaṃ samathassa paccayo, evaṃ samathopi tassa paccayoti.
当琵琶被弹奏时,其声使心染着,故称“染着”。由于它不释放而绑住心,故称“系缚的”。“缠缚物”:指琴弦附着缠绕之处。“角”:因为弹奏琵琶而发声,故得名为“角”的木棒,或以角等任何材料制成的拨子。因此说“四方形的坚实小棒”。显示巴利原文
Vādiyamānāya vīṇāya. Cittaṃ rañjetīti rajjanena. Avissajjanīyatāya cittaṃ bandhatīti bandhanīyo. Veṭṭhaketi tantīnaṃ āsajjanaveṭṭhake. Koṇanti kavaṇato vīṇāya saddakaraṇato koṇanti laddhanāmaṃ dārudaṇḍaṃ siṅgādīsu yena kenaci kataṃ ghaṭikaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘caturassaṃ sāradaṇḍaka’’nti.
因为那位国王或大臣并未如实了知声音,为了显示他那不了知的状态,故说“我将看见声音”等。显示巴利原文
Yasmā so rājā rājamahāmatto vā saddaṃ yathāsabhāvato na aññāsi, tasmiṃ tassa ajānanākārameva dassetuṃ ‘‘saddaṃ passissāmī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
“不贞”(Asatī):据说在圣典中是以词性颠倒的方式表述的,说话者为保持原本的词性,便说为“asā”。在解释了“Asatī”是下贱的称呼之后,为了说明其用法,便说“世间的妇女名为不贞”,意思是世间的妇女即是不贞者,继而说明其原因:“她们没有界限”。在世间常理中,兄长、弟弟、舅舅等这些界限与分际,在她们那里是不存在的。为什么会这样?因为她们爱染深重、行为放肆,会藉由交合而与一切人发生关系。如何呢?如同“消耗一切的希奇士”。因此他说——显示巴利原文
Asatī kirāyanti pāḷiyaṃ liṅgavipallāsena vuttanti yathāliṅgameva vadanto ‘‘asā’’ti āha. ‘‘Asatīti lāmakādhivacana’’nti vatvā tattha payogaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘asā lokitthiyo nāmā’’ti vuttaṃ, loke itthiyo nāma asatiyoti attho, tattha kāraṇamāha ‘‘velā tāsaṃ na vijjatī’’ti. Pakatiyā loke jeṭṭhabhātā kaniṭṭhabhātā mātulotiādikā velā mariyādā tāsaṃ na vijjati. Kasmā? Sārattā ca pagabbā ca sabbesampi sambhogavasena viniyogaṃ gacchanti. Kathaṃ? Sikhī sabbaghaso yathā. Tenevāha –
一切河流皆有弯曲的流向,一切树林都由树木构成……
一切女人,若得隐蔽之所,皆会作恶。(《本生经》2.21.308)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sabbā nadī vaṅkagatī, sabbe kaṭṭhamayā vanā; Sabbitthiyo kare pāpaṃ, labhamāne nivātake’’ti. (jā. 2.21.308);
其他如弦乐器、方鼓等也是如此。五蕴譬如箜篌,因为是众多法的集合;瑜伽行者譬如国王,因为他是与彼相关诸法的追寻者。‘他’(assa):即指瑜伽行者。显示巴利原文
Aññampi tantibaddhaṃ caturassaambaṇavāditādīni. Vīṇā viya pañcakkhandhā anekadhammasamūhabhāvato. Rājā viya yogāvacaro tappaṭibaddhadhammagavesakattā. Assāti yogāvacarassa.
‘趣’(gati)一词,也用于地狱等以外的其他地方。因此,为了加以简别,如同说‘苦苦’‘色色’一样,而说‘趣趣’(gatigati),意即被称为‘趣’的流转之处。因此说到:‘在此中间轮回流转。’所谓‘生趣’(sañjātigati),意即产生之处本身就是趣。显示巴利原文
Nirayādito aññasmimpi gati-saddo vattati. Tato visesanatthaṃ ‘‘gatigatī’’ti vuttaṃ ‘‘dukkhadukkhaṃ, rūparūpa’’nti ca yathā, gatisaññitaṃ pavattiṭṭhānanti attho. Tenāha – ‘‘etthantare saṃsarati vattatī’’ti. Sañjāyanapadeso eva gatīti sañjātigati.
然而,那是为了借助可现见的母胎住处——这成为众生悚惧事之处,来显示那趣,所以说了“此是其身”等。对于色法,其自相就是趣的终点,此后再无其他,故为“自相趣”。“非有”即彻底的无。相续的断绝为“非有趣”,因为它以非有为终点。“坏灭”即刹那灭,这里同样是到达其终点,因此是同一理路。“乃至有顶”即乃至一切有之顶。“自相趣”“非有趣”与“坏灭趣”,由于已经通过“此是同一理路”来说明,所以不再另外安立。对于那漏尽者而言,这些趣并不存在,因为它们已被无上道彻底断除。显示巴利原文
Taṃ pana gatiṃ sattānaṃ saṃvegavatthubhūtassa paccakkhassa gabbhāsayassa vasena dassetuṃ ‘‘ayamassa kāyo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Rūpadhammassa salakkhaṇaṃ gati niṭṭhā, tato paraṃ aññaṃ kiñci natthīti salakkhaṇagati. Abhāvo accantābhāvo. Santānavicchedo vibhavagati taṃniṭṭhānabhāvā. Bhedoti khaṇanirodho, idhāpi taṃniṭṭhānatāyeva pariyāyo. Yāva bhavaggāti yāva sabbabhavaggā. Salakkhaṇavibhavagatibhedagatiyo ‘‘eseva nayo’’ti imināva pakāsitāti na gahitā. Tassa khīṇāsavassa na hoti aggamaggena samucchinnattā.
“戒”已说明,是因为在色等所缘上防护欲等已作宣说。“中间”部分说明了定修习,因为经中阐明“只于内住立……乃至……入定”。“结尾”部分说明了涅槃,因为经中说“凡他……乃至……不存在”。显示巴利原文
Sīlaṃkathitaṃ rūpādīsu chandādinivāraṇassa kathitattā. Majjhe samādhibhāvanā kathitā ‘‘ajjhattameva santiṭṭhati…pe… samādhiyatī’’ti jotitattā. Pariyosāne ca nibbānaṃ kathitaṃ ‘‘yampissa…pe… na hotī’’ti vacanato.
第十 六种动物譬喻经的解释显示巴利原文
10. Chappāṇakopamasuttavaṇṇanā
247 “Vaṇasarīro”:指有创伤的身体。“Pakkattā”:因腐烂。“在箭杆中,箭的通称”:意即“kaṇḍa”一词是箭的同义语,故说“saravana即kaṇḍavana(箭林)”。“Arugatto……乃至……”:应知,功德身由于在下、中、上各部分有断裂、孔隙、戒行不平坦、割截等毁坏与不圆满的过失,故称为疮身等。这里,“草”意指“刺”,因为类似刺;或者“草刺”一词,就是指草本身的形态。显示巴利原文
247.Vaṇasarīroti vaṇitasarīro. Pakkattāti kuthitattā. Saradaṇḍesu sarasamaññāti kaṇḍa-saddo sarapariyāyoti āha – ‘‘saravananti kaṇḍavana’’nti. Arugatto…pe… veditabbo guṇasarīrassa khaṇḍachiddasīlādīhi heṭṭhā majjhe uparibhāge ca bhedavisamacchinnavikāradosattā. Ettha kusā ‘‘kaṇṭakā’’ti adhippetā kaṇṭakasadisattā, kusatiṇānaṃ eva vā vuttākārapadeso ‘‘kusakaṇṭako’’ti vutto.
“以刺穿村民之义”:即本不配受供者,却接受他们所作(的供养),以此压迫他们之义。显示巴利原文
Gāmavāsīnaṃ vijjhanaṭṭhenāti nārahova hutvā tesaṃ kārānaṃ paṭiggahaṇavasena pīḷanaṭṭhena.
“Pakkhin”:指象形鸟。据说它的嘴如同象鼻,因此称为“象鼻鸟”。“Vissajjeyya”:即如以绳系缚后再放出那样。显示巴利原文
Pakkhinti hatthiliṅgasakuṇaṃ. Tassa kira hatthisoṇḍasadisaṃ mukhaṃ, tasmā ‘‘hatthisoṇḍasakuṇa’’nti vuttaṃ. Vissajjeyyāti rajjuyā yathābaddhaṃ eva vissajjeyya.
“Bhogehi”:即以自己身体的盘绕。“Maṇḍalaṃ bandhitvā”:结成圆环,即让身体保持圆环的形状而安住。“Supissāmīti”:我将进入睡眠。“Ḍetukāmo”:想要飞起。“Disā disaṃ”:从此方到彼方。显示巴利原文
Bhogehīti attano sarīrabhogehi. Maṇḍalaṃ bandhitvāti yathā sarīraṃ maṇḍalākārena tiṭṭhati, evaṃ katvā. Supissāmīti niddaṃ okkamissāmi. Ḍetukāmoti uppatitukāmo. Disā disanti disato disaṃ.
六处犹如六种动物,由于志欲各不相同;而它们志欲的差异,应看作是由于它们各自趋向不同的境域。渴爱如坚固的绳索,因为是它把这些(六处)捆绑在一起。无明如位于中间的结,因为它是此结缚难以解开的根本原因。所缘之所以变得强而有力,既因为它令人愉悦可爱,也因为在它之上,渴爱的执取异常牢固。显示巴利原文
Cha pāṇakā viya cha āyatanāni nānajjhāsayattā, nānajjhāsayatā ca nesaṃ nānāvisayaninnatāya daṭṭhabbā. Daḷharajju viya taṇhā tesaṃ bandhanato. Majjhe gaṇṭhi viya avijjā bandhanassa dubbinimmocanahetuto. Ārammaṇaṃ balavaṃ hoti manuññabhāvena ceva tattha taṇhābhinivesassa daḷhabhāvena ca.
或者,就引喻的方式而言,是与相似的(喻)联系起来。“Appanā”:即结合。在经文中,正是以“正是如此”等语句安立了比喻。眼具有不稳定的志欲,是因为它对色、心等有着不稳定的倾向。对其余诸处,亦依此理可知。显示巴利原文
Sarikkhakena vā upamāya āharaṇapakkhe. Appanāti saṃsandanā. Pāḷiyaṃyeva appitā upamā ‘‘evameva kho’’tiādinā. Rūpacittādivisamaninnattā cakkhussa visamajjhāsayatā. Esa nayo sesesupi.
“Kaṇṇacchiddakūpake”:在名为耳孔的洞窟中。“Tassā”:指耳(处)的。“Paccayo hoti”:成为缘(依止缘),因为若没有它,便无法执取声音。在宣说了“纵使是空无的虚空也可以”之后,为了显示它的缘性,而说了“内有毛等”等语。“Dhātuparamparā ghaṭṭento”:撞击界的相续,即撞击诸界之相续。显示巴利原文
Kaṇṇacchiddakūpaketi kaṇṇacchiddasaññite āvāṭe. Tassāti sotassa. Paccayo hotīti upanissayo hoti tena vinā saddaggahaṇassa abhāvato. ‘‘Ajaṭākāsopi vaṭṭati evā’’ti vatvā tassa paccayabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘antoleṇasmi’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Dhātuparamparā ghaṭṭentoti bhūtaparamparāsaṅghaṭṭento.
“若是如此”:即当声音像这样通过界之相续到达耳径时,耳有“已至行境”的性质。如果耳如同鼻等那样执取已至者,便不可能了知“远处有声音”,因为它执取已至境的缘故。意识有种种了知的方式,乃是由于执取方式的差别。然而,耳识的生起在两种情况下都是相同的。纵使立于远处的声音,也能成为在该处产生回响等的缘,应许如铁的运动之于磁石那样看待。“法性”:即法的自性,意思是:这是声音的自性。能从各处听闻,是因为获得了名为虚空的依止。不过,如果耳是执取已至者,那么心生的声音就不能作为耳识的所缘缘。在《发趣论》中,虽一般说“声处以所缘缘为缘,而作为耳识的缘”,但外界并没有心生的声音。或者,心生的声音通过界的相续撞击耳净色,那个通过相续转起的,已经不再是心生的声音了,因为它是时节生的。因此,声音在何处生起,就只安住于该处而到达耳净色的领域,这是此处应得的结论。故说:“它确实是以未至为行境。”显示巴利原文
Evaṃ santeti evaṃ bhūtaparamparāvasena sadde sotapathamāgacchante. Sampattagocaratā hoti sotassa. Ghānādīnaṃ viya ‘‘dūre saddo’’ti jānanaṃ na sambhaveyya sampattagāhibhāvato. Tathā tathā jānanākāro hoti manoviññāṇassa gahaṇākāravisesato. Sotaviññāṇappavatti pana ubhayattha samānāva. Dūre ṭhitopi saddo tādise ṭhāne paṭighosādīnaṃ paccayo hoti ayokanto viya ayocalanassāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Dhammatāti dhammasabhāvo, saddassa so sabhāvoti attho. Tato tato savanaṃ hoti ākāsasaññitassa upanissayassa labbhanato. Yadi pana sotaṃ sampattagāhī siyā, cittasamuṭṭhānasaddo sotaviññāṇassa ārammaṇapaccayo na siyā. Paṭṭhāne ca avisesena ‘‘saddāyatanaṃ sotaviññāṇassa ārammaṇapaccayena paccayo’’ti vutto, bahiddhā ca cittajassa saddassa sambhavo natthi. Atha vā cittajo saddo dhātuparamparāya sotapasādaṃ ghaṭṭeti, na so cittajo saddo, yo paramparāya pavatto. Utujo hi so, tasmā yathuppanno saddo, tattha ṭhitova sotapasādassa āpāthaṃ āgacchatīti niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘asampattagocarameveta’’nti.
那时,由于没有危险,而证得心一境性。因为鼻是依止于名为鼻孔的虚空而转起的,故说鼻以虚空为住处。由于无风便不能执取香,故以风为依止的香为行境。因此说“确实如此”等。显示巴利原文
Tadā ekaggacittataṃ āpajjati parissayānaṃ abhāvato. Nāsacchiddasaṅkhātaākāsasannissaye vattanato ghānaṃ ākāsajjhāsayaṃ vuttaṃ. Vātena vinā gandhagahaṇassa asambhavato vātūpanissayagandhagocaraṃ. Tenāha ‘‘tathā hī’’tiādi.
“村”:即应从村中获取的食物;由于倾向于彼,故说以村为住处。确实,味是生命的征相,即生命;由于倾向于它,故呼求它,因此名为“舌”。不可能凭借唾液了知未湿润之物的味,因此舌是以水为依止、以味为所缘的。显示巴利原文
Gāmato laddhabbaṃ āhāraṃ gāmaṃ, tanninnatāya gāmajjhāsayatā vuttā. Tathā hi jīvitanimittaṃ raso jīvitaṃ, tasmiṃ ninnatāya taṃ avhāyatīti jivhā. Na sakkā kheḷena atemitassa rasaṃ jānituṃ, tasmā āposannissitarasārammaṇā jivhāti.
在不净的墓地之外。‘执受为倾向’:指倾向于执受,即依存于身体自身。以身净色为依止的地界,唯当触所缘撞击时,识方于彼处生起,否则不生,故说‘依止于地的触所缘’。‘确实如此’等,是证明身以执受为倾向的论据。‘内或外’:指内在的或外在的。‘身的’:指身体的。‘被善建立者’等,显示彼地界作为缘的状态。显示巴利原文
Āmakasusānato bahi. Upādiṇṇakajjhāsayoti upādiṇṇakaninno. Kāyapasādasannissayabhūtāya pathaviyā phoṭṭhabbārammaṇe ghaṭite eva tattha viññāṇuppatti, na aññathāti vuttaṃ ‘‘pathavīsannissitaphoṭṭhabbārammaṇo’’ti. Tathā hītiādi kāyassa upādiṇṇakajjhāsayatāya sādhakaṃ . Ajjhattikabāhirāti ajjhattikā bāhirā vā. Assāti kāyassa. Susanthatassātiādi tassa pathaviyā paccayabhāvadassanaṃ.
‘种种倾向’:指心倾向于种种所缘。以此显示意犹如猿猴般不稳定。故说‘即使于先前曾见过的所缘,心亦飘移’等。‘执取根本有分’一语,排除了后继有分。‘意的’:即心的。如此,当知此为唯作识。‘种种’:即差异性。显示巴利原文
Nānajjhāsayoti nānārammaṇaninno. Tena manassa makkaṭassa viya anavaṭṭhitataṃ dasseti. Tenāha ‘‘diṭṭhapubbepī’’tiādi. Mūlabhavaṅgaggahaṇena piṭṭhibhavaṅgaṃ nivatteti. Assāti manassa. Evaṃ kiriyamayaṃ viññāṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Nānattanti bhedo.
譬如那些通过防止心随其喜好转起而如同被束缚的人。‘没有随从的状态’:指没有名为‘贪染’的躁动。‘不牵引’:指在自己的境域——色所缘上,心既不牵引心相续,也不牵引具有彼心的补特伽罗。此处唯说前行观,因为经中从处的角度教导:‘诸比丘,你们应当这样学’。显示巴利原文
Yathārucippavattiyā nivāraṇavasena baddhānaṃ. Nibbisevanabhāvanti lolatāsaṅkhātaparipphandassa abhāvaṃ. Nākaḍḍhatīti savisaye rūpārammaṇe cittasantānaṃ, taṃsamaṅginaṃ vā puggalaṃ nākaḍḍhati. Pubbabhāgavipassanāva kathitā āyatanamukhena ‘‘evañhi vo, bhikkhave, sikkhitabba’’nti vuttattā.
11. 《稻秆经》注疏解释显示巴利原文
11. Yavakalāpisuttavaṇṇanā
248 “稻堆”指成熟稻谷堆积成堆。“手持木杖者”即执持棍杖之人。“应打谷”意指:如同使名为稻的谷物从茎秆脱落一般,应这样打谷。“除去稻谷”指从稻穗上通过打谷使稻谷脱落并分离出来。显示巴利原文
248.Yavapuñjo suparipakkayavasamudāyo. Kājahatthāti daṇḍahatthā. Potheyyunti yathā yavasaṅkhātaṃ dhaññaṃ vaṇṭato muccati, evaṃ potheyyuṃ. Yave sāvetvāti yavasīsato yave pothanena mocetvā vivecetvā.
六处犹如四衢街口,因为是受所缘之杖击打之处。有情如同稻束,因为会被这些所缘击打。六种杖,即依自性各各分为可意、不可意与中等,共成十八种所缘,对处于稻束地位的有情进行击打。因对有存在的渴求而不断辗转再生,故于“希望有烦恼”中使用复数。或者,将“希望有及作为其缘的烦恼”理解为“希望有烦恼”。因为一切轮回之苦皆以希望有为根本,故接着说“如是,有情”等。“希望有烦恼”即是以希望有为根本的烦恼。显示巴利原文
Catumahāpatho viya cha āyatanāni ārammaṇadaṇḍakehi hananaṭṭhānattā. Yavakalāpī viya satto tehi haññamānattā. Cha byābhaṅgiyo viya sabhāvato chadhāpi paccekaṃ iṭṭhāniṭṭhamajjhattavasena aṭṭhārasa ārammaṇāni yavakalāpaṭṭhāniyassa sattassa hananato. Bhavapatthanāya aparāparuppattiṃ sandhāya ‘‘bhavapatthanā kilesā’’ti bahuvacananiddeso. Bhavapatthanā ca tassa paccayabhūtā kilesā cāti bhavapatthanākilesāti evaṃ vā ettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Yasmā sattānaṃ vaṭṭadukkhaṃ nāma sabbampi taṃ bhavapatthanāmūlakaṃ, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘evaṃ sattā’’tiādi. Bhavapatthanakilesāti ca bhavapatthanāmūlakaṃ kilesaṃ.
“陆地”是依近处义而用陆地一词,故说“在善法堂门前”。“未作”指未造作苦。“如食新粪的猪”犹如喜食新粪的猪。“唯以心”是说被束缚者唯依其心而受束缚。因此,如同毗摩质多罗的束缚获得解脱一般,故称“毗摩质多罗束缚”。“智解脱的束缚”即由智慧而解脱的束缚。显示巴利原文
Bhummanti samīpatthe bhummaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘sudhammāya dvāre’’ti. Na katanti dukkhuppādanaṃ na kataṃ. Navagūthasūkaraṃ viyāti navagūthabhakkhasūkaraṃ viya. Cittenevāti yo bajjhati, tassa citteneva . Tasmāti yasmā vepacittibandhanassa bandhanamuccanaṃ viya, tasmā ‘‘vepacittibandhana’’nti vuttaṃ. Ñāṇamokkhaṃ bandhananti ñāṇena muccanaṃ bandhanaṃ.
「妄想者」是指:基于构想出的爱执,而想“这是我的”;基于见,而想“这是我之我”;基于慢,而想“我就是这个”。因为脱离五蕴并不存在妄想的对象,所以说“于诸蕴中妄想”。这里的「魔的」是属格形式。「被烦恼魔所缚」即是被烦恼魔以同样的烦恼束缚所绑。「已解脱者」亦依此理可知。显示巴利原文
Maññamānoti parikappitataṇhāvasena ‘‘etaṃ mamā’’ti, diṭṭhivasena ‘‘eso me attā’’ti, mānavasena ‘‘esohamasmī’’ti maññanto. Khandhavinimuttassa maññamānavatthuno abhāvā ‘‘khandhe maññanto’’ti vuttaṃ. Etanti ‘‘mārassā’’ti etaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Kilesamārena baddhoti kilesamārena teneva kilesabandhanena baddho. Muttoti etthāpi eseva nayo.
当存在爱妄想时,见妄想与慢妄想必然伴随,因此既以“我是”一词说示了见妄想与慢妄想,也以“我是”一词说示了爱妄想。以“我是此”一词所说的见妄想,是纯粹依据当前所得见所缘而言的。以“我将是”而说对未来见所缘构想的见妄想,因为一般拥抱未来即是常见;即便是以断灭见的方式生起,那也是见妄想。接着,“有色”等词只是对常见所执的不同标识。因为妄想如同疾病带来过患,如同痈肿内有隐患,如同箭刺入的过患,依于这些爱等烦恼,明显动摇称为“动”,不明显的动摇称为“悸动”;“戏论”应理解为于轮回中长久流转,或者扩展为蕴相续;达到放逸的状态,达到昏昧的状态。此处的“它们的”是指那些爱、见等烦恼。「为显示行相」即是为了显示它们转起的行相。显示巴利原文
Taṇhāmaññanāya sati diṭṭhimānamaññanānaṃ pasaṅgo eva natthīti yathā ‘‘asmī’’ti padena diṭṭhimānamaññanā vuttā honti, evaṃ taṇhāmaññitāpīti vuttaṃ ‘‘asmīti padena taṇhāmaññitaṃ vutta’’nti. Ayamahamasmīti padena diṭṭhimaññitanti etarahi labbhamānadiṭṭhivatthuvaseneva. Bhavissanti anāgatadiṭṭhivatthuparikappanavaseneva diṭṭhimaññitaṃ. Yebhuyyena hi anāgatāliṅganā sassatadiṭṭhi. Ucchedavasena diṭṭhimaññitamevāti ānetvā sambandho. Rūpītiādīni padāni. Sassatassevāti sassatagāhasseva pabhedadīpanāni. Yasmā maññitaṃ ābādhavasena rogo, antodosavasena gaṇḍo, aṅganikantavasena sallaṃ, tasmā imehi taṇhādīhi kilesehi pākaṭacalanavasena iñjanti ceva, apākaṭasañcalanavasena phandanti ca. Papañcitaṃ saṃsāre cirāyanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, khandhasantānassa vā vitthāraṇaṃ. Pamattākārappattā mucchanākārappattā. Tesanti taṇhādiṭṭhikilesānaṃ. Ākāradassanatthanti pavattiākāradassanatthaṃ.
「慢」是指以“我是优越者”“我是同等者”“我是低劣者”等方式,呈现骄矜的状态。为何要说“与爱相应的慢”呢?难道所有慢不都与爱相应吗?的确,因为存在不同的情况,所以需要加以简别。事实确实如此:爱有时是慢的缘,有时并非慢的缘,由此慢被称为不定。正如《发趣论》中说:“以结法为缘,结法生起,以因缘”,在此通过各种可得的关系,揭示了诸结之间的相互关联:“以欲贪结为缘,生起慢结、无明结”;又说“以欲贪结为缘,有无明结”;“以慢结为缘,生起有贪结、无明结”;“以有贪结为缘,有无明结”。这里通过欲贪结和有贪结,揭示了慢的不定性。其中,针对强力的爱,而说“与爱相应的慢”。因为与强力爱相应的慢,其自身也变得强而有力,以“我是”的特别自负方式生起。显示巴利原文
Māno nāma ‘‘seyyohamasmī’’tiādinā majjanākārappavatti. Taṇhāya sampayuttamānavasenāti kasmā vuttaṃ? Nanu sabbo māno taṇhāsampayutto? Sati hi byabhicāre visesanaṃ icchitabbanti. Saccametaṃ, taṇhā pana atthi mānassa paccayabhūtā, atthi mānassa appaccayabhūtā, yato māno aniyato vuccati. Tathā hi paṭṭhāne ‘‘saṃyojanaṃ dhammaṃ paṭicca saṃyojano dhammo uppajjati hetupaccayā’’ti ettha saṃyojanāni saṃyojanehi yathālābhaṃ yojetvā dassitayojanāya ‘‘kāmarāgasaṃyojanaṃ paṭicca mānasaṃyojanaṃ avijjāsaṃyojana’’nti vatvā ‘‘kāmarāgasaṃyojanaṃ paṭicca avijjāsaṃyojana’’nti, ‘‘mānasaṃyojanaṃ paṭicca bhavarāgasaṃyojanaṃ avijjāsaṃyojana’’nti ca vatvā ‘‘bhavarāgasaṃyojanaṃ paṭicca avijjāsaṃyojana’’nti vuttaṃ. Ettha ca kāmarāgabhavarāgasaṃyojanehi mānassa aniyatabhāvo pakāsito. Tattha yā taṇhā balavatī, taṃ sandhāya idaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘taṇhāya sampayuttamānavasenā’’ti. Balavataṇhāsampayutto hi māno sayampi balavā hutvā asmīti savisesaṃ majjanavasena pavattatīti.
“以见的方式”:指以慢为根本的见。因为那些多慢的人,抱持“我胜”等心,于色等某一所缘,当“我即是此”之见生起时,由于慢尚未被断除,慢也会在那些地方生起。因此,针对以慢为根本的见,而说“依于‘我是此’之见而说”。然而,问难者不解此义,把不可得的相应关系执为可得而诘问道:“难道不是吗?”等等。对方回答:“是的,没有”,接受了此义,随后以“然而,对于慢……”等作出答复。其义已如前释。显示巴利原文
Diṭṭhivasenāti mānamūlakadiṭṭhivasena. ‘‘Seyyohamasmī’’tiādinā hi bahulamānupetassa puggalassa rūpādīsu ekaṃ uddissa ayamahamasmīti diṭṭhiyā uppannāya mānassa appahīnattā mānopi tattha tattheva uppajjati. Iti mānamūlakaṃ diṭṭhiṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘ayamahamasmīti diṭṭhivasena vutta’’nti. Codako pana imamatthaṃ ajānanto anupalabbhamānameva sampayogatthaṃ gahetvā ‘‘nanu cā’’tiādinā codeti. Itaro ‘‘āma natthī’’ti tamatthaṃ sampaṭicchitvā ‘‘mānassa panā’’tiādinā parihāramāha. Tassattho vutto eva.